Menu

Acts 9:2 — Word Study

Depth

N1904ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

BSArequestedaiteō [asked for, desired] frompara himautos lettersepistolē [epistles, written messages] ineis DamascusDamaskos [the city in Syria] topros theho synagogues,sunagōgē [gatherings, assemblies] so thathopōs ifean anytis he shall findehuriskō [discovered, met] of theho wayhodos [the path of Jesus, the Christian faith] beingeimi menanēr [adult males] bothte andkai women,gunē [females] bounddeō [lead, take, bound, captive] he may bring [them]agō toeis Jerusalem.Hierousalēm [the holy city, the capital of Palestine]

Word
Listen & take awayActs 9
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 2 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (Hierousalēm) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Acts 9:2quick helps
In a sentenceSaul sought letters to arrest followers of Jesus in Damascus.
Who is speakingSaul, later known as Paul, is the one making the request.
Where we areThis verse occurs during Saul's journey to persecute Christians.
The hard wordᾐτήσατο
Take awaySaul's intent was to imprison those who followed the Way.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause verbαἰτέω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Acts 9:2

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Saul's Mission to Damascusgenerated

1Meanwhile, Saul was still breathing out murderous threats against the disciples of the Lord. He approached the high priest
2and requested letters to the synagogues in Damascus, so that if he found any men or women belonging to the Way, he could bring them as prisoners to Jerusalem.
3As Saul drew near to Damascus on his journey, suddenly a light from heaven flashed around him.
4He fell to the ground and heard a voice say to him, “Saul, Saul, why do you persecute Me?”

Acts 9:2 describes Saul's determination to root out Christians by obtaining official letters to arrest them in Damascus. This reflects his zealous commitment to the Jewish faith and opposition to the early church, which he viewed as a threat. This moment is pivotal, as it sets the stage for his dramatic conversion experience on the way to Damascus, which is narrated shortly after in Acts 9:3.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Acts 9:14And now he is here with authority from the chief priests to arrest all who call on Your name.”
2Acts 7:19He exploited our people and oppressed our fathers, forcing them to abandon their infants so they would die.
3Acts 22:5as the high priest and the whole Council can testify about me. I even obtained letters from them to their brothers in Damascus, and I was on my way to apprehend these people and bring them to Jerusalem to be punished.
4Acts 26:12In this pursuit I was on my way to Damascus with the authority and commission of the chief priests.
5Esther 3:8–13Then Haman informed King Xerxes, “There is a certain people scattered and dispersed among the peoples of every province of your kingdom. Their laws are different from everyone else’s, and they do not obey the king’s laws. So it is not in the king’s best interest to tolerate them.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 12 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ᾐτήσατο, aiteōgenerated

The verb ᾐτήσατο (aiteō) means 'requested' and is derived from the root meaning 'to ask.' It indicates a formal request, often with a sense of urgency, as seen in this context where Saul seeks permission to act against the followers of Jesus.

In the middle voice, this verb suggests that Saul is not just asking but is actively involved in the request, highlighting his personal commitment to the task at hand. This reflects the intensity of his mission to persecute the early Christians.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The Berean Standard Bible translates the verse with the word requested, which is also used in the New English Translation and Modern English Version. The King James Version opts for desired, while the American Standard Version uses asked.

The translations agree on the overall meaning of Saul's request for letters, but they differ in the choice of verbs and phrases. Notably, so that (BSB) contrasts with that (ASV), reflecting different ways to express purpose.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the sentence is ᾐτήσατο, he requested, which governs the entire clause. The structure includes several phrases that describe the content and purpose of the request.

The sentence is complex, with a noun phrase acting as the subject and multiple clauses providing details about the request, the intended recipients, and the conditions under which Saul would act.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

αἰτέω appears in the Septuagint, translating the Hebrew word שָׁאַל (H7592), meaning 'to ask' or 'inquire'. This connection emphasizes the continuity of the act of requesting across both Testaments.

The term ἐπιστολή is also present in the Septuagint, referring to a written message, similar to its usage in the New Testament, indicating formal communication.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Acts 9:2 shows Saul asking for letters to arrest men and women who followed Jesus in Damascus. This highlights his determination to stop the spread of the Christian faith.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does Saul mean by 'the Way'?

The 'Way' refers to the early Christian movement and followers of Jesus, indicating a specific path or belief system distinct from traditional Judaism.

Why did Saul seek letters to the synagogues?

Saul sought letters to gain authority to arrest Christians, showing his commitment to persecuting those he viewed as heretics.

What was the significance of Saul's request?

This request marks a crucial moment in the early church's history, as it sets the stage for Saul's conversion and transformation into Paul, a key figure in spreading Christianity.

How does this verse connect to Saul's later life?

Saul's request for letters foreshadows his dramatic encounter with Jesus on the road to Damascus, leading to his conversion and subsequent ministry as Paul.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What motivates Saul's actions in this passage, and how do they reflect his beliefs?
  2. How can we understand the term 'the Way' in the context of early Christianity?
  3. In what ways does Saul's request illustrate the tension between Judaism and the early Christian movement?
  4. How can we apply Saul's transformation to our own lives and faith journeys?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Tertullian references this verse in his work, highlighting the significance of 'the Way' in Christian practice and prayer.

TertullianOn Prayer c. 155–220
He warned us, to be sure, at that time (for elsewhere our Discipline is called "the Way" ), that when, set in "the way" of prayer, we go not unto "the Father" with anger.

Tertullian argues that 'the Way' is a term for the Christian faith, emphasizing the importance of approaching God without anger during prayer.

Early Church Fathers on Acts 9 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Acts 9:2 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And desired of him letters to Damascus,.... Damascus was the head or metropolis of Syria, Isaiah 7:8 And so Pliny (z) calls it Damascus of Syria: it was a very ancient city; it was in the times of

Read John Gill on Acts 9 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And desired of him letters to Damascus to the synagogues, that if he found any of this way, whether they were men or women, he might bring them bound unto Jerusalem.

Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 9 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

To the synagogues; this council, though it sat at Jerusalem, had a power (whether commanding or recommending) over all the synagogues within or without Judea. Of this way; this was eminently so called, being the way of God, and the way of life, and the only right and true way: any profession, persuasion, or manner of life, is called a way frequently in Scripture, . Men or women; it speaks their extraordinary rage, that would not spare the weaker sex, who are generally spared on that account. Bring them bound; which shows that he carried many with him, to the further aggravation of his sin. Unto Jerusalem; where they had power to judge of such things, and out of which it was impossible that…

Read Matthew Poole on Acts 9 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

2 And desired of him letters to Damascus to the synagogues, that if he found any of this way, whether they were men or women, he might bring them bound unto Jerusalem. Ver. 2. Letters to Damascus] The high priest, it seems, then had power at Damascus, and elsewhere out of Judea, to bind and beat his Jews, for misdemeanour in point of their religion. See Acts 18:15.

Read John Trapp on Acts 9 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(2) And desired of him letters to Damascus.—We learn from 2 Corinthians 11:32-33, that Damascus was at this time under the government of Aretas, the king of Arabia Petræa. How it came to be so, having been previously under Vitellius, the Roman president of Syria (Jos. Ant. xiv. 4, § 5), is not clear. It is probable, however, that in the war which Aretas had declared against Herod Antipas, in consequence of the Tetrarch’s divorcing his daughter in order that he might marry Herodias (see Notes on Matthew 14:3; Luke 3:14), he had been led, after defeating the Tetrarch (Jos. Ant. xviii. 5, § 1), to push his victories further; and, taking advantage of the absence of Vitellius, who had hastened…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 9 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 2. Letters to Damascus to the synagogues] Damascus, anciently called דמסק Damask, and דרמסק Darmask, was once the metropolis of all Syria. It was situated at fifty miles' distance from the sea; from which it is separated by lofty mountains. It is washed by two rivers, Amara or Abara, which ran through it, and Pharpar, called by the Greeks Chrysorrhoas, the golden stream, which ran on the outside of its walls. It is one of the most ancient cities in the world, for it existed in the time of Abraham, Genesis 14:15; and how long before is not known. The city of Damascus is at present a place of considerable trade, owing to its being the rendezvous for all the pilgrims from the north of…

Read AdamClarke on Acts 9 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

2. and desired of him letters] These are the papers which constituted his “authority and commission” (Acts 26:12). From that passage we learn that the issuing of these papers was the act of the whole body, for Paul there says they were “from the chief priests.”to Damascus] Of the history of this most ancient (Genesis 14:15) city in the world, see the Dictionary of the Bible. It had from the earliest period been mixed up with the history of the Jews, and great numbers of Jews were living there at this time, as we can see from the subsequent notices of their conduct in this chapter. We are told by Josephus (B. J. ii. 20. 2) that ten thousand Jews were slaughtered in a massacre in Damascus in…

Read Cambridge on Acts 9 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And desired of him - This shows the intensity of his wish to persecute the Christians, that he was willing to ask for such an employment.

Read Albert Barnes on Acts 9 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

and requested letters to the synagogues in Damascus, so that if he found any men or women belonging to the Way, he could bring them as prisoners to Jerusalem.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

and asked for letters from him to the synagogues of Damascus, that if he found any who were of the Way, whether men or women, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

and requested letters to the synagogues in Damascus, so that if he found any men or women belonging to the Way, he could bring them as prisoners to Jerusalem.

NETBNew English Translation2006

and requested letters from him to the synagogues in Damascus, so that if he found any who belonged to the Way, either men or women, he could bring them as prisoners to Jerusalem.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And desired of him letters to Damascus to the synagogues, that if he found any of this way, whether they were men or women, he might bring them bound unto Jerusalem.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

and asked of him letters to Damascus unto the synagogues, that if he found any that were of the Way, whether men or women, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem.

RVARevised Version, American1894

and asked of him letters to Damascus unto the synagogues, that if he found any that were of the Way, whether men or women, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And desired from him letters to Damascus to the synagogues, that if he should find any of this way, whether they were men or women, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And desired of him letters to Damascus to the Synagogues, that if he found any that were of that way (either men or women) hee might bring them bound vnto Hierusalem.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

and asked of him letters to Damascus, to the synagogues, so that if he found any who were of the way, both men and women, he might bring [them] bound to Jerusalem.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

did ask from him letters to Damascus, unto the synagogues, that if he may find any being of the way, both men and women, he may bring them bound to Jerusalem.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

asked from him letters to Damascus, to the synagogues, that if he may find any being of The Way, both men and women, he may bring them bound to Jerusalem.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

and asked him for letters for the synagogues in Damascus, so that if he found any who belonged to the Way, whether men or women, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And asked of him letters to Damascus, to the synagogues: that if he found any men and women of this way, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

and asked for letters of authorization to take with him to the synagogues in Damascus, giving him permission to arrest any believers in the Way that he found, men or women, and bring them back to Jerusalem as prisoners.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And made a request for letters from him to the Synagogues of Damascus, so that if there were any of the Way there, men or women, he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ᾐτήσατοaiteō requested G154 4 different renderings
askedASV DBY DRA LSV RVA ULB
desiredGNV KJV NWB
requestedBSB MSB NETB
asked forFBV WEB
ὅπωςhopōs so that G3704 2 different renderings
thatASV DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA WEB YLT
so thatBBE BSB DBY MSB NETB ULB
εὕρῃehuriskō he shall find G2147 2 different renderings
he foundASV BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB
findLSV NWB YLT
ὄνταςeimi being G1510 2 different renderings
wereASV BBE DBY GNV KJV NWB RVA WEB
beingLSV YLT
δεδεμένουςdeō bound G1210 2 different renderings
boundASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
takeBBE FBV
ἀγάγῃagō he may bring [them] G71 2 different renderings
bringASV BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
he may bringLSV YLT

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲButclausenoun phrase · subject-ΣαῦλοςSaulclause · adverbialadverbialἔτιstillverbἐμπνέωνbreathing outnoun phrase · objectἀπειλῆςthreatsκαὶandφόνουmurderprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςtowardnoun phraseτοὺςthenoun phraseμαθητὰςdisciplesnoun phraseτοῦof theΚυρίουLordclause · adverbialverbπροσελθὼνhaving gonenoun phrase · adverbialτῷto theἀρχιερεῖhigh priestverbᾐτήσατοrequestedprepositional phrase · adverbialπαρ’fromαὐτοῦhimnoun phrase · objectnoun phraseἐπιστολὰςlettersprepositional phraseεἰςinΔαμασκὸνDamascusprepositional phraseπρὸςtonoun phraseτὰςtheσυναγωγάςsynagoguesclauseὅπωςso thatclauseἐάνifclauseverbεὕρῃhe foundnoun phrase · objectnoun phraseτιναςanyadjective phraseclausenoun phrase · predicateτῆςof theὉδοῦwaylinking verbὄνταςbeingnoun phraseτεbothἄνδραςmenκαὶandγυναῖκαςwomenclauseadverbialδεδεμένουςhaving boundverbἀγάγῃhe might bring [them]prepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςtoἹερουσαλήμJerusalem

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

et petiit ab eo epistolas in Damascum ad synagogas : ut si quos invenisset hujus viæ viros ac mulieres, vinctos perduceret in Jerusalem.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܫܐܠ ܠܗ ܐܓܪܬܐ ܡܢ ܪܒ ܟܗܢܐ ܕܢܬܠ ܠܗ ܠܕܪܡܣܘܩ ܠܟܢܘܫܬܐ ܕܐܢ ܗܘ ܕܢܫܟܚ ܕܪܕܝܢ ܒܗܕܐ ܐܘܪܚܐ ܓܒܪܐ ܐܘ ܢܫܐ ܢܐܣܘܪ ܢܝܬܐ ܐܢܘܢ ܠܐܘܪܫܠܡ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

ᾐτήσατο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπιστολὰς εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς, ὅπως ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας, δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Acts 9:2αἰτέωrequestedrequestedαἰτέωπαράfromfromπαράαὐτόςhimhimαὐτόςἐπιστολήletterslettersἐπιστολήεἰςininεἰςΔαμασκόςDamascusDamascusΔαμασκόςπρόςtotoπρόςthetheσυναγωγήsynagogues,synagogues,συναγωγήὅπωςso thatso thatὅπωςἐάνififἐάντὶςanyanyτὶςεὑρίσκωhe shall fihe shall findεὑρίσκωof theof theὁδόςwaywayὁδόςεἰμίbeingbeingεἰμίἀνήρmenmenἀνήρτέbothbothτέκαίandandκαίγυνήwomen,women,γυνήδέωboundboundδέωἄγωhe may brinhe may bring [tἄγωεἰςtotoεἰςἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem.Jerusalem.Ἱεροσόλυμαἐπιστέλλωv. I writev. I write, senἐπιστέλλωὅςRel.pr. whRel.pr. who, whὅςεἰCond. ifCond. ifεἰπυνθάνομαιv. I ask, v. I ask, inquiπυνθάνομαιἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦπρόPrep. befoPrep. beforeπρόσυνάγωv. I gathev. I gather togσυνάγωἄνθρωποςn.m. a mann.m. a man, oneἄνθρωποςκαίCj. and, eCj. and, even, καίγίνομαιv. I come v. I come into γίνομαιδεῖv. it is nv. it is necessδεῖδέομαιv. I requev. I request, bδέομαιἹεροσόλυμαn.f. & n.nn.f. & n.n. JerἹεροσόλυμαεἰσέρχομαιv. I go inv. I go in, comεἰσέρχομαιΠιλᾶτοςn.m. Pilatn.m. PilateΠιλᾶτοςπίνωv. I drinkv. I drink, imbπίνωθάλασσαn.f. the sn.f. the sea, lθάλασσα
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Acts 9:2

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ᾐτήσατοaiteō requested G154 Verb · aorist · middle · indicative · third person · singular
70× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To ask or request something from someone, like in Matthew 7:7 where Jesus says to ask and it will be given to you.
Amplified meaning
asked for, desired
Tyndale gloss
to ask
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αἰτέω (aiteō) means to ask or request, often with an accusative case for the thing requested or the person being asked. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 7:7 and James 1:6. The word can also imply a demand or a petition, and it is noted that it has similarities with other terms like ἐρωτάω (erōtaō), though they are not entirely synonymous.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — αἰτέω, ἐρωτάω from a scan

TueEse words are often rendered by our Translators as though they covered the same spaces of meaning, the one as the other; nor can we object to their rendering, in numerous instances, αἰτεῖν and ἐρωτᾶν alike by our English ‘to ask.’ Yet sometimes they have a little marred the perspicuity of their translation by not varying their word, where the original has shown them the way. For example, the obliteration at John xvi. 23 of the distinction between αἰτεῖν and ἐρωτᾶν might easily suggest a wrong interpretation of the verse,—as though its two clauses were in near connexion, and direct antithesis,—being indeed in none. In our Version we read: ‘In that day ye shall ask Me nothing [ἐμὲ οὐκ ἐρωτήσετε οὐδέν]. Verily, verily, I say unto you, Whatsoever ye shall ask [ὅσα dv αἰτήσητε) the Father in my name, He will give it you.” Now every one competent to judge is agreed, that “ ye shall ask” of…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἰτέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for שׁאל;]

to ask, request: absol., Mt 7:7, Ja 1:6; c. acc. pers., Mt 5:42, Lk 6:30; c. acc. rei, seq. ἀπό, Mt 20:20, I Jo 5:15; id. seq. παρά, Ac 3:2, Ja 1:5; c. dupl. acc. Mt 7:9, Mk 6:22, Jo 16:23. Mid. (on the distinction bet. mid. and act., v. M, Pr., 160): absol., Mk 15:8, Jo 16:26, Ja 4:3; c. acc. rei, Mt 14:7, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἰτέω, -ῶ; fut. αἰτήσω:; 1 aor. ἤτησα: pf. ἤτηκα ; Mid., pres. αἰτοῦμαι ; impf. ἠτούμην ; fut. αἰτήσομαι ; 1 aor. ἡτησάμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to ask; mid. to ask for one’s self, request for one’s self; absol.: Jas. i. 6; Mt. vii. 7; mid., Jas. iv. 3; Jn. xvi. 26; Mk. xv. 8; aireiσθαί τι, Jn. xv. 7; Mt. xiv. 7; Mk. vi. 24; x. 38; xi. 24; xv. 43; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 52; Acts xxv. 3, 15, ete. ; αἰτεῖν with ace. of the pers. to whom the request is made: Mt. v. 42; vi. 8; Lk. vi. 30; αἰτεῖσθαι with acc. of the pers. asked for— whether to be released, Mt. xxvii. 20; Mk. xv. 6 [here T WH Tr mre. παραιτ. q- v-]; Lk. xxiii. 25; or bestowed as a gift, Acts xiii. 21; αἰτεῖν τι ἀπό twos, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt.; [Lk. xii. 20 Tr WH]; 1 Jn. v. 15 L T Tr WH; (so αἰτεῖσθαι in Plut. Galb. 20) [ef. B. 149 (130)]; ri παρά τινος, Acts iii. 2; Mt. xx. 20 R G T Tr mre. WH mrg.; Jas. i.5; 1 Jn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἰτέω. The ordinary meaning of this word ‘‘to make a request,” ““to ask for something” is borne out by the papyri, e.g. P Fay 109} (carly i/A.D.) αἴτησον Σάραν τὰς τοῦ (δραχμὰς) uB, ‘‘ask Saras for the twelve (silver) drachmae.” In ἐῤ. 121. (c, A.D. 100) it is construed with the accusative of the thing and παρά, τὸ δέρμα τοῦ μόσχου οὗ ἐθύ[σ]αμεν αἴτησον παρὰ τοῦ] κύρτου βυρσέως, “ask the hunchbacked tanner for the hide of the calf that we sacrificed ” (Edd.): cf. Ac 3%. See further σοῦ. ἐρωτάω, and for the distinction between active and middle Pvo/eg., p. 160f. If the middle connotes a greater degree of earnestness, it is natural that it should be more frequent than the active, as for example in the phrases αἰτούμενος λόγον SyA@ . . . (P Hamb I, 65 (A.D. 129), αἰτούμενος... ὀνόματα... δίϑομει (GU I. 91° a.p. 170-1), and see the list of passages in the index to Sy// (iii. p. 245). The…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἰτέω (aiteō) — to ask.

αἰτ-έω

(Aeolic dialect αἴτημι [Refs 5th c.BC+], Ionic dialect imperfect αἴτεον[Refs 5th c.BC+]future αἰτήσω: aorist ᾔτησα: perfect ᾔτηκα[NT]: pluperfect ᾐτήκει[Refs 2nd c.AD+]perfect passive ᾔτημαι, etc.:—ask, beg, absolutely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. mostly with accusative of things, ask for, demand, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁδὸν αἰ. ask leave to depart, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἰ. τινί τι to ask something for one,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative person et of things, ask a person for a thing, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δίκας αἰ. τινὰ φόνου to demand satisfaction from one for.., [NT+6th c.BC+]

3. with accusative person et infinitive, ask one to do, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

4. with accusative only, beg of, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

5. in Logic, postulate, assume, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἰτέω

aiteo

of uncertain derivation; to ask (in genitive case):--ask, beg, call

for, crave, desire, require. Compare 4441.

see GREEK for 4441

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἰτέω

v.

I ask, request, beg, petition

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἰτέω aiteō 70x

to ask, request; demand; desire, Acts 7:46

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἰτέω to ask, beg, Od., etc.

c. acc. rei, to ask for, crave, demand, Hom., etc.; ὁδὸν αἰτ. to beg one's departure, i. e. ask leave to depart, Od.:—c. acc. pers. et rei, to ask a person for a thing, Hom., etc.; δίκας αἰτ. τινὰ φόνου to demand satisfaction from one for murder, Hdt.

c. acc. pers. et inf. to ask one to do, Od., etc.

Mid. to ask for oneself, to claim, Aesch., etc.:—but often used just like Act.

Pass.:

of persons, to have a thing begged of one, Hdt., Thuc.

of things, to be asked, τὸ αἰτεόμενον Hdt., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AMI-3S — Verb · aorist · middle · indicative · third person · singular
aorist middle indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AMI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
17%asking
asking17% · 12×you ask6% · 4×we shall ask6% · 4×do ask6% · 4×you may ask6% · 4×he will ask for4% · 3×you shall ask4% · 3×ask for3% · 2×other renderings49% · 34×

70 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 70 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
προσεύχομαιI pray, pray forπροσκυνέωI worshipΠιλᾶτοςPilate
Article the
γάρforἀγαθόςgoodἅγιοςset apart, holy,
ἐάνCond
ὅς
ἄνDisj
ὅσοςτὶςσύ
ὅς
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thφυλακήa watching, guarὑπέρ
αἰτέωrequested70×
what comes after →
Article the
σῶμαbody, fleshυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
δίδωμιI offer, giveοὐNegγίνομαιI come into bein
αὐτός
σταυρόωI crucifyκαίand, even, also,
σύ
δίδωμιI offer, giveποιέωI do, makeλόγοςa word, speech,
λαμβάνωI receive, take
καίand, even, also,ἀπό

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἰτέω · 70× in the New Testament
Matthew John Luke Acts Mark 1 John James Ephesians 1 Corinthians 1 Peter Colossians
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 23 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 72c. AD 40

„εἰ“ γάρ φησιν „ἀποκριθεὶς εἴποι ὁ παῖς Ἠγάπηκα τὸν κύριόν μου καὶ τὴν γυναῖκά μου καὶ τὰ παιδία, οὐκ ἄπειμι ἐλεύθερος“, ἀχθεὶς πρὸς τὸ κριτήριον τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ δικαστοῦ τυχὼν αὐτοῦ βέβαιον σχήσει ὃ ᾐτήσατο, πρότερον τρυπηθεὶς τὸ οὖς ὀπητίῳ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.245c. AD 75–95

εὔχεται μὲν οὖν τῷ θεῷ Ῥεβέκκαν, ἣν τῷ παιδὶ Ἅβραμος μνηστευσόμενον ἐξαπέστειλεν, εἰ κατὰ νοῦν τὸν αὐτοῦ μέλλει ὁ γάμος οὗτος συντελεῖσθαι, ἐν ἐκείναις εὑρεθῆναι γνωρισθῆναι τε αὐτὴν τῶν μὲν ἄλλων αἰτοῦντι ποτὸν ἀρνουμένων ἐκείνης δὲ αὐτῷ…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 36.4c. AD 96

Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε: αἴτησαι παῤ ἐμοῦ, καὶ δώσω σοι ἔθνη τὴν κληρονομίαν σου καὶ τὴν κατάσχεσίν σου τὰ πέρατα τῆς γῆς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Sijp. 56OxyrhynchitesAD 1–AD 100

μα δικέλλας ὅσας ἐὰν δύνῃ τῷ ἐλαιῶνι … … ν τῷ σῷ ὅδε εἰμὶ αἰτήσας … σε ἐκκόψαι ἑκατὸν καὶ δέκα … ς. … δύο ἐπιμεληθῆναι Ἀσκλᾶς … ἀποκαταστήσει

P.Mich. 9 568Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 92

γενείωι ἐξ ἀριστερῶν ἐπάναγκον τὴν ὁμολογοῦσαν Ταευήμερον ἀποδώσειν τῶι Μάρκῳ Ἀνθεστίῳ Γεμέλλῳ ἐν αἷς ᾐτήσατο αὐτὸν εἰς συμπεριφορὰν τῆς ἀποδόσεως ἡμέραις πέντε ἀπὸ τῆς προκειμένης τὰς ὀφειλομένας τῇ τοῦ

P. Mich. 9 569Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 92

γενείωι ἐξ ἀριστερῶν ἐπάναγκον τὴν ὁμολογοῦσαν Ταευήμερον ἀποδώσειν τῷ Μάρκωι Ἀνθεστίωι Γεμέλλωι ἐν αἷς ᾐτήσατο αὐτὸν εἰς συνπεριφορὰν τῆς ἀποδόσεως ἡμέραις πέντε ἀπὸ τῆς προκειμένης τὰς ὀφειλομένας τῇ τοῦ

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
παρ᾽para from G3844 Preposition
192× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means 'from' or 'beside', indicating the source or origin of something, as seen in Mark 14:43 and John 15:26. It can also mean 'at' or 'in the vicinity of' something. Used to show the relationship between people or things.
Tyndale gloss
from/with/beside
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παρά is a preposition that conveys the idea of proximity, meaning 'beside' or 'from the side of.' It can take the genitive, dative, or accusative case, indicating source, location, or motion towards something. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts involving relationships, such as 'his family' (Mk 3:21) or 'from God' (Jn 9:16). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρά, prep. c. gen., dat., acc.,

with radical sense, beside.

C. gen. pers., from the side of, from beside, from, indicating source or origin, [in LXX for מֵאֵצֶל, מִיַד, מִלִּפְנֵי;] after verbs of motion, Mk 14:43, Lk 8:49, Jo 15:26, al.; after verbs of seeking, receiving, hearing, etc., Mk 8:11 12:2, Jo 4:9, 52 10:18, Phl 4:18, II Ti 1:18, Ja 1:7, al.; after passive verbs, of the agent (like ὑπό), Mt 21:42, Mk 12:11, Lk 1:37; absol., οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ, his family, his kinsfolk, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρά, [it neglects elision before prop. names beginning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.’s text) before some other words; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95, cf. W. § 5, 1 a.; B. 10], a preposition indicating close proximity, with various modifications corresponding to the various cases with which it is joined; ef. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 643 sqq.; Matthiae § 588; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq.; Ktihner § 440; Kriiger § 68, 34-36. It is joined I. with the GenitIvE; and as in Grk. prose writ. always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or from one’s sphere of power, or from one’s wealth or store, Lat. a, ab; Germ.von ... her, von neben; French de chez; [Eng. from beside, from]; Sept. for *339D, 7°, Syxn (1S. xvii. 30); cf. W. 364 (342) sq- a. properly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence, after verbs of coming, departing, setting out…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παρά is found in the NT c. gen. (78 times), c. dat. (50 times), and c. acc. (60 times): see Proleg. p. 106. All these constructions can be freely illustrated from our sources. (1) c. gen. indicating source or origin ‘‘ from the side of,” “*from,’’ used of persons after verbs of receiving etc.: Ostr 10278 (Ptol.) (= LAZ, p. 152) ἀπέχω παρὰ σοῦ τὸ ἐπιβάλλον (cf. Lk 1515) μοι ἐκφόριον, “1 have received from you the fruit that falleth to me,” P Petr 11. τι (1)° (mid. iii/B.c.) = Witkowski’, p. 8) γίνωσκε δέ pe ἔχοντα παρὰ Φιλωνίδου (δραχμὰς) o, P Eleph 13? (B.C. 223-2) (= Witkowski’, p. 42) παραγενομένου Lav@tos ἐκομισάμην τὴν παρὰ cov ἐπιστολήν, P Tebt II. 28322 (B.c. 93 or 60) τούτου δὲ γενομ[έϊνου ἔσομαι τετευχὼς [TH]s Tapa cod ἀντιλήμψεως, ‘* for if this is done I shall have obtained succour from you” (Edd.), P Oxy IV. 742? (B.c. 2) παράλαβε παρὰ Πόθου τὸν κάλαμ[ο]ν πανα[ρ]ιθμῶι, ‘take…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παρά (para) — from/with/beside.

πᾰρά [ρᾰ],

Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also παραί: shortened πάρ, in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Lyric poetry (but rarely in Trag., in Lyric poetry passages, [Refs 5th c.BC+], and in all dial ects except Attic dialect, [Refs 4th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative, properly beside: hence,

__A WITH GEN. properly denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:

__A.I of Place, πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πλευρὰ παρ᾽ ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield,[Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.II commonly of Persons,

__A.II.1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc., ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, [NT+5th c.BC+]; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ᾽ Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

παρά

para

a primary preposition; properly, near; i.e. (with genitive case) from

beside (literally or figuratively), (with dative case) at (or in) the

vicinity of (objectively or subjectively), (with accusative case) to

the proximity with (local (especially beyond or opposed to) or causal

(on account of):--above, against, among, at, before, by, contrary to,

X friend, from, + give (such things as they), + that (she) had,

X his, in, more than, nigh unto, (out) of, past, save,

side...by, in the sight of, than, (there-)fore, with. In compounds it

retains the same variety of application.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παρά

Prep.

from, in the presence of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παρά para 194x

(1) gen., from, indicating source or origin, Mt. 2:4, 7; Mk. 8:11; Lk. 2:1; οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ, his relatives or kinsmen, Mk. 3:21; τὰ παρ’ αὐτῆς πάντα, all her substance, property, etc., Mk. 5:26. (2) dat., with, in, among, etc., Mt. 6:1; 19:26; 21:25; 22:25; παρ’ ἑαυτῷ, at home, 1 Cor. 16:2; in the sight of, in the judgment or estimation of, 1 Cor. 3:19; 2 Pet. 2:11; 3:8. (3) acc., motion, by, near…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παρά from the side of, c. gen., beside, alongside of, c. dat., to the side of, motion alongside of, c. acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radical sense beside:

WITH GENIT. from the side of, from beside: from, φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος παρὰ μηροῦ Il.

commonly of Persons, ἦλθε πὰρ Διός id. Il.; ἀγγελίη ἥκει παρὰ βασιλῆος Hdt.; ὁ παρά τινος ἥκων his messenger, Xen.

issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι παρά τινος to be born from him, Plat.; when it follows a Noun, a particip. may be supplied, ἡ παρὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων δόξα glory from (given by) men, id. Plat.; τὸ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Xen.; παρ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ διδόναι to give from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
36%from
from36% · 71×with21% · 40×by7% · 13×at5% · 9×beside5% · 9×contrary to3% · 6×beyond3% · 6×than3% · 6×other renderings18% · 35×

195 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial84%predicate7%object5%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 192 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰμίI am, existἀκούωI hear, listenδαπανάωI spend, bear ex
αὐτός
ῥίπτωI throw, cast, tγίνομαιI come into beinλέγωI say, speak
εἰμίI am, exist
ἀδύνατοςincapable, imposκαίand, even, also,ἸουδαῖοςJewish
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ὅςArticle the
τὶς
βραχύςshort, littleἔρχομαιI come, goπροσδοκάωI expect, await
παράfrom192×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, ὁδόςa way, road, jou
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oποῦIrg
σύ
μένωI remain, abideεἰμίI am, existἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o
ἐγώ
Article theἑπτάIndecπίνωI drink, imbibe
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαρά · 192× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Matthew Mark Romans Hebrews 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Galatians James 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.5c. AD 100

ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Νεχούτης Σχώτου τοῦ Φιμήνιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν νε

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Μεσορὴ ε ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ὠνή. ἀπέδοτο Πανοβχοῦνις Παοῦτος Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
αὐτοῦautos him G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςhim5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ἐπιστολὰςepistolē letters G1992 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
24× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to a written message, like a letter, as seen in Acts 9:2 and 1 Corinthians 5:9. It is about sending a note or a formal letter. The New Testament includes many epistles, including those written by Paul.
Amplified meaning
epistles, written messages
Tyndale gloss
epistle
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιστολή (i.e., *epistolē*) means a letter or message, often used in the context of written communication. It encompasses both informal letters and formal commands, appearing frequently in the New Testament, such as in Acts and Corinthians. The word is derived from ἐπιστέλλω and reflects a range of uses, including official documents and letters of commendation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπι-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ

(< ἐπιατέλλω),

[in LXX for אִגֶּרֶת, etc.; freq. in Mac ;]

a message.

a letter, an epistle: Ac 9:2, I Co 5:9, al.; pl., Ac 22:5, I Co 16:3, al.; ἐ. σνστατικαί, II Co 3:1 (cf. Milligan, NTD, 254 f.). (On the NT ἐπιστολαί, cf. Milligan, Th., 121 ff.; NTD, 85 ff.; Deiss., BS, 3 ff.; St. Paul, 8 ff.)

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπι-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπιστέλλω), a letter, epistle: Acts xv. 30; Ro. xvi. 22; 1 Co. v. 9, ete.; plur., Acts ix. 2; 2Co. x. 10, ete.; ἐπιστολαὶ συστατικαί, letters of commendation, 2 Co. iii. 1 [W. 176 (165). On the possible use of the plur. of this word interchangeably with the sing. (cf. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 113, 8), see Bp. Lghtft. and Meyer on Phil. iii. 1. (Eur., Thue., al.)] -

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπιστολή. Preisigke in his Fachwérter, p. 90, has classified various more or less technical usages of this common word. Thus in P Amh II, 6419 (a.p. 107) the copy of an official letter addressed to the strategus with reference to the public baths of Hermopolis is headed—avrtypadov ἐπιστολῆς, and in P Hamb I. 18 4-6 (a.p, 222) a συνκολ(λήσιμον) is mentioned αὐθ(εντικῶν) ἐπιστολ(ῶν) kal βιβλ(ιδίων) ὑποκεκολ(λημένων). In BGU IV. 1046%1-5 (not before A.D. 166) (= Chrest. I. p. 315) we learn that the persons selected for certain public duties were appointed by the epistrategus—8u’ ἐπιστολ(ῆς) κομισθι(είσης) καὶ προγρα(φείσης) (*‘ openly placarded up”’) ; while in Chvest. I. 2616 (a.p. 135) a petition, instead of being lodged in the usual way as a ὑπόμνημα, takes the form of an ἐπιστολή : see Wilcken’s note ad 7. In BGU IV. 11357 (prob. B.C. 10) κατὰ] νομογραφικὴν ἐπιστ[ολήν, the word is = ‘‘…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιστολή (epistolē) — epistle.

ἐπιστολ-ή, ἡ,

(ἐπιστέλλω) anything sent by a messenger, message, order, commission, whether verbal or in writing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐξ ἐπιστολῆς by command, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: used by Trag. always in plural, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Πενθέως ἐπιστολαῖς by his commands, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τέκνων ἐπιστολὰς ἔγραψεν commands about her children, [Refs]

2. letter, ἐ. διαπέμπειν, ἀποδοῦναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πέμπειν τινί [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in plural of one letter, like{γράμματα}, Latin litterae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ἐπὶ τῶν ἐπιστολῶν.. τοῦ Ὄθωνος, Latin ab epistulis Othoni, his secretary, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; νομογραφικὴ ἐ. [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιστολή

epistole

from 1989; a written message:--"epistle," letter.

see GREEK for 1989

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιστολή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

a letter, dispatch, epistle

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιστολή epistolē 24x

word sent; an order, command; an epistle, letter, Acts 9:2; 15:30

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιστολή ἐπιστολή, ἡ, ἐπιστέλλω a message, command, commission, whether verbal or in writing, Hdt., attic; ἐξ ἐπιστολῆς by command, Hdt.

a letter, Lat. epistola, Thuc., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

let'-erz.

See ALPHABET; WRITING.

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Lu 23:38 The Hebrews have certain acrostic poems which begin with the letters of the alphabet, ranged in order. The most considerable of these is Ps 119:1-176, which contains twentytwo stanzas of eight verses each, all acrostic; that is, the first eight begin with Aleph, the next eight with Beth, and so on. Ps 25:1-22 34:1-22, have but twenty-two verses each, beginning with the twentytwo letters of the Hebrew alphabet. Others, as Ps 111:1-112:10, have one-half of the verse beginning with one letter, and the other half with the next. Thus, Blessed is the man who feareth the Lord,

Who delighteth greatly in his commandments.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Written by David to Joab 2Sa 11:14

→ King of Syria to king of Israel 2Ki 5:5,6

→ Rabshakeh to Hezekiah Isa 37:9-14

→ King of Babylon to Hezekiah Isa 39:1

→ Sennacherib to Hezekiah 2Ki 19:14

→ Of Artaxerxes to Nehemiah Ne 2:7-9

→ Open letter from Sanballat to Nehemiah Ne 6:5

→ Luke to Theophilus (the books of Luke and Acts) Ac 1:1

→ Claudius Lysias to Felix Ac 23:25-30

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%letter
letter67% · 16×letters33% · 8×

24 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object38%adverbial38%subject17%predicate8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 24 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνὅτιthat, since, becδιά
διά
δοκιμάζωI put to the tesλόγοςa word, speech, μήτεNeg
γράφωI write
σύ
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἐν
αὐτός
παρά
ἐπιστολήletters24×
what comes after →
ἐν
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastὅς
οὗτος
πέμπωI sendσημειόωI note
ἐγώ
σύ
εἰς
ΔαμασκόςDamascus
δέχομαιI take, receive, acc
πρός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπιστολή · 24× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Acts 2 Thessalonians 1 Corinthians 2 Peter 1 Thessalonians Colossians Romans
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaEvery Good Man is Free 96c. AD 40

μηνύει δὲ ἡ πεμφθεῖσα ἐπιστολὴ τῷ βασιλεῖ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 7.136c. AD 75–95

ταῦτα γράψας καὶ σημηνάμενος τῇ αὑτοῦ σφραγῖδι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἔδωκεν Οὐρίᾳ κομίσαι πρὸς Ἰώαβον.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 47.1c. AD 96

Ἀναλάβετε τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τοῦ μακαρίου Παύλου τοῦ ἀποστόλου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Edg. $1Karien258 BC

r Ἀπολλόδοτος Χαρμίδει χαίρειν· ὑπογέγραφά σοι τῶν πρὸς Ξάνθιππον ἐπιστολῶν τὰ ἀντίγραφα. ἐντυχὼν οὖν αὐτῶι καὶ περὶ τῶν Βυξε δραχμῶν εἴδησον πῶς βούλεται οἰκονομῆσαι,

P.Grenf. 1 11Arsinoites182 BC

αὐτῶν ανενεγκεῖν ἐπὶ σὲ τὰ συγκεκριμένα τοῦ δὲ Πεχύτου γράψαντός σοι διὰ τῆς ὑποκειμένης ἐπιστολης καταστάντας ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει παρόντος Δημητρίου τοῦ φρουράρχου, Ἀσκληπιάδου ὑπηρέτου, Πολιάνθου Ψεμμίνιος τοῦ Πατοῦτος

P.Grenf. 1 30Pathyris104 BC

προστάτην τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος βεα … ρων … δια … στρατιωτῶν … τὴν ἐπιστολὴν … ντες, οἷς καὶ ἐντετάλμεθα ἀσπάσεσθαι ὑμᾶς παρʼ ἡμῶν φιλοφρόνως καὶ διὰ γραμμάτων ἐκρίναμεν

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
εἰςeis in G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ΔαμασκὸνDamaskos Damascus G1154 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
15× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Damascus is a city in Syria, mentioned in Acts 9 and 2 Corinthians 11:32. It was an important city in biblical times.
Amplified meaning
the city in Syria
Tyndale gloss
Damascus
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

Δαμασκός refers to Damascus, a city in Syria, and is derived from Hebrew. It appears in several New Testament passages, including Acts and Galatians. The entries consistently identify it as a proper noun without significant disagreement among lexicons.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Δαμασκός, -οῦ, ἡ (Heb. דַּמֶּשֶׂק),

Damascus: Ac 9:2ff. 22:5ff. 26:12, 20, II Co 11:32, Ga 1:17.†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Δαμασκός (Damaskos) — Damascus.

Δαμασκός, -οῦ, ἡ (Heb. דַּמֶּשֶׂק),

Damascus: Act.9.2ff. 22:5ff.26.12,20, 2Co.11:32, Gal.1:17.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Δαμασκός

Damaskos

of Hebrew origin (1834); Damascus, a city of Syria:--Damascus.

see HEBREW for 01834

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Δαμασκός, οῦ, ἡ

n.f.

Damascus

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Δαμασκός Damaskos 15x

Damascus, the capital city of Syria

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

da-mas'-kus:

1. The Name

2. Situation and Natural Features

3. The City Itself

4. Its History

(1) The Early Period (to circa 950 BC)

(2) The Aramean Kingdom (circa 950-732 BC)

(3) The Middle Period (732 BC-650 AD)

(4) Under Islam

1. Name:

The English name is the same as the Greek Damaskos. The Hebrew name is Dammeseq, but the Aramaic form Darmeseq, occurs in 1Ch 18:5; 2Ch 28:5. The name appears in Egyptian inscriptions as Ti-mas-ku (16th century BC), and Sa-ra-mas-ki (13th century BC), which W. M. Muller, Asien u. Europa, 227, regards as representing Ti-ra-mas-ki, concluding from the "ra" in this form that Damascus had by that time passed under Aramaic influence. In the Tell el-Amarna Letters the forms Ti-ma-as-gi and Di-mas-ka occur. The Arabic name is Dimashk esh-Sham ("Damascus of Syria")…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Damascus

Activity, the most ancient of Oriental cities; the capital of Syria (Isa. 7:8; 17:3); situated about 133 miles to the north of Jerusalem. Its modern name is Esh-Sham; i.e., “the East.”

The situation of this city is said to be the most beautiful of all Western Asia. It is mentioned among the conquests of the Egyptian king Thothmes III. (B.C. 1500), and in the Amarna tablets (B.C. 1400).

It is first mentioned in Scripture in connection with Abraham’s victory over the confederate kings under Chedorlaomer (Gen. 14:15). It was the native place of Abraham’s steward (15:2). It is not again noticed till the time of David, when “the Syrians of Damascus came to succour Hadadezer” (q.v.), 2 Sam. 8:5;

A celebrated metropolis of Syria, first mentioned in Ge 14:15 15:2, and now probably the oldest city on the globe. It stands on the river Barada, the ancient Chrysorrhoas, in a beautiful and fertile plain on the east and south east of Anti-Lebanon. See ABANA, and Pharpar. This plain is about fifty miles in circumference; it is open to the desert of Arabiaon the south and east, and is bounded on the other sides by the mountains. The region around and north of Damascus, including probably the valley between the ridges of Lebanon and Anti-Lebanon, is called in the Scriptures, "Syria of Damascus," 2Sa 8:5, and by Strabo, Coelesyria. This city, which at first had its own kings, was taken by David, 2Sa 8:5,6; and by Jeroboam

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%damascus
damascus100% · 15×

15 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial73%predicate13%object7%indirect object7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 15 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰς
ἐπιστολήa letter, dispatεἰσάγωI lead in, bringἀδελφόςa brother
ἐν
Article theμαθητήςa learner, disciκατοικέωI dwell in, sett
Article the
ἐγγίζωI come near, appεἰς
ΔαμασκόςDamascus15×
what comes after →
πρός
Article the
ἐξαίφνηςsuddenly, unexpected
τέDisj
ὄνομαname, character, rep
ἉνανίαςAnanias
μαθητήςa learner, disciple,
ἡμέραa day
συμβιβάζωI unite, prove, inst
ὅτιthat, since, bec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΔαμασκός · 15× in the New Testament
Acts 2 Corinthians Galatians
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 25 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaWho is the Heir of Divine Things 2c. AD 40

ὁ δὲ υἱὸς Μασὲκ τῆς οἰκογενοῦς μου οὗτος Δαμασκὸς Ἐλιέζερ“, καὶ πάλιν „ἐπειδὴ ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔδωκας σπέρμα, ὁ δὲ οἰκογενής μου κληρονομήσει με” (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.145c. AD 75–95

τῶν δὲ Ἀράμου παίδων τεσσάρων ὄντων Οὔσης μὲν κτίζει τὴν Τραχωνῖτιν καὶ Δαμασκόν, μέση δʼ ἐστὶ τῆς Παλαιστίνης καὶ κοίλης Συρίας·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD
P.Rain.Unterricht 60AD 601–AD 700

Column i Δαμασκός Δαρῖος δίκαιος Δεφεσος Δανιῆλ δόξαζε

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
πρὸςpros to G4314 Preposition
700× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition showing direction or relationship, like towards or with something, as seen in Mark 5:11 and John 18:16. This means indicating movement or direction. It's about showing proximity or connection.
Tyndale gloss
to/with
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πρός is a preposition that indicates direction, proximity, or relation. It can be used with the genitive to denote motion from a place, with the dative for local proximity, and with the accusative to express motion towards a place or object. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as Acts 27:34 for benefit and Mark 5:11 for proximity.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πρός,

prep. c. gen., dat., acc.

C. gen., of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaph., in the interests of, Ac 27:34 (cf. Page, in l.).

C. dat., of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mk 5:11, Lk 19:37, Jo 18:16 20:11, 12, Re 1:13.

C. acc., of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards.

Of place,

after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mt 3:14, Mk 6:51, Lk 11:5, Jo 2:3,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πρός, a preposition, i.q. Epic mpori, from πρό and the adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German vor . . . hin [Curtius § 381]); it is joined I. with the AccusaTIvE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denoting direction towards athing, or position and state looking towards a thing (W. § 49h. p. 404 (378)): it is used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a movement is directed: πρός twa or τι, a. prop. after verbs of going, departing, running, coming, ete.: ἄγω, Jn. xi. 15; ἀναβαίνω, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. xx. 17; Acts xv. 2; ἀνακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xvili. 21; ἀνέρχομαι, Gal. i. 17 [1]. Tr mrg. arépy.]; ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. » xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc.; πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to his house, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the ys.; Tr reads mp. αὐτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζων (see 2 Ὁ. below) ]; Jn. xx. 10 [Ὁ Tr αὐτούς, WH air. (cf. s. v. αὑτοῦ sub fin.)]; γίνεσθαι πρός τινα, to come to one, 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πρός reference to place PSI IV. 31178 (iv/A.D.?) πρ]ὸς τὴν Aavitk.ay τῆς κοίλης Dupials. Headlam (on Herodas VII. 123) holds that τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν in Mk 2? ‘‘is surely idiomatic (not vulgar as Moulton thinks) ‘spots which commanded the door’”: cf. Mt 310, Lk 35. For πρός, ‘‘with,” as in Jn ΤΡ, Heb 41%, cf. Epict. iv. 9. 13 πρὸς ὃν οὐδείς ἐστί σου πιθανώτερος (see Sharp Ξε, p. 92). And for the possibility that the difficult πρός in Mk 63, οἷ", 14%, Jn 1}, 1 Jn 1?, is to be explained as an Aramaism, see Rendel Harris Prologue to S. John’s Gospel p. 8f., and Burney Avamaic Origin of the Fourth Gospel p. 28 f. (6) of time = ‘‘for’’ (a time) and no longer—BGU I. 1131? (A.D. 143) βουλόμενος παρεπιδημεῖν πρὸς καιρόν (cf. Lk 818), P Oxy I. 6714 (A.D. 338) πρὸς ὀλίγον εἰσχύει, ‘‘withstands but for a short time” (cf. Jas 4), and P Flor III. 282° (A.D. 520) πρὸς ὅλον χρόνον. (c) of mental…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πρός (pros) — to/with.

πρός,

preposition, expressing direction,

__A on the side of, in the direction of, hence with genitive, dative, and accusative, from, at, to: Epic dialect also προτί and ποτί, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] usually with accusative, more rarely with dative, and each only once with genitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—dialectal forms: Doric dialectποτί (which see) and ποί, but Cretan dialect πορτί [Refs], Argive προτ(ί) [Refs 7th c.BC+] πός [Refs 4th c.BC+]., also sometimes in Asia Minor in compounds, see at {ποσάγω},{ποσφέρω}; Aeolic dialect πρός [Refs 7th c.BC+]; πρές [Refs 6th c.AD+]; Pamphylian περτ (ί) [Refs] (With προτί, πρός cf. Sanskrit práti 'towards, near to, against, back, etc.', Slavonic protiv[ucaron], Lett. pret 'against', Latin pretium: ποτί (which see) and πός are not cognate) [Refs 4th c.BC+] refers to that from which something…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πρός

pros

a strengthened form of 4253; a preposition of direction; forward to,

i.e. toward (with the genitive case, the side of, i.e. pertaining to;

with the dative case, by the side of, i.e. near to; usually with the

accusative case, the place, time, occasion, or respect, which is the

destination of the relation, i.e. whither or for which it is

predicated):--about, according to , against, among, at, because of,

before, between, (where-)by, for, X at thy house, in, for intent, nigh

unto, of, which pertain to, that, to (the end that), X together, to

(you) -ward, unto, with(-in). In the comparative case, it denotes

essentially the same applications, namely, motion towards, accession

to, or nearness at.

see GREEK for 4253

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πρός

Prep.

to, towards, with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πρός pros 700x

from; met. for the benefit of, Acts 27:34; with a dative, near, by, at, by the side of, in the vicinity of, Mk. 5:11; Lk. 19:37; with an accusative, used of the place to which anything tends, to, unto, towards, Mt. 2:12; 3:5, 13; at, close upon, Mt. 3:10; Mk. 5:22; near to, in the vicinity of, Mk. 6:45; after verbs of speaking, praying, answering to a charge, etc., to, Mt. 3:15; 27:14; of place where, with, in, among, by, at, etc., Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πρός prep. with gen., implying motion from a place; with dat., abiding at a place; with acc., motion to a place

WITH GEN.,

of Place, from, from forth, Hom., Soph.

on the side or quarter of, νήσοισι πρὸς Ἤλιδος islands looking (as it were) from Elis, i. e. towards Elis, Od.; πρὸς τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου ἵδρυται μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Στρύμονος lies more towards (i. e. nearer) the Hellespont than the Strymon, Hdt.; ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο πρὸς Ὀλύνθου Thuc., etc.:—often with words denoting the points of the compass, δύω θύραι εἰσίν, αἱ μὲν πρὸς βορέαο, αἱ δ᾽ αὖ πρὸς νότου one looking north wards, the other south wards, Od.; so, οἰκέουσι πρὸς νότου ἀνέμου Hdt., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
69%to
to69% · 506×with7% · 48×for6% · 42×toward4% · 30×against3% · 21×at3% · 20×unto2% · 18×other renderings5% · 37×other renderings1% · 10×

732 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 32 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial93%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 700 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,Article theνύξthe night, night
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakArticle theπαραγίνομαιI appear, come,
αὐτός
ἄγωI leadφέρωI carry, bear, bμαθητήςa learner, disci
ἐγώ
ὑπέρσῶμαbody, fleshυἱόςa son, descenden
πρόςto700×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a godμαθητήςa learner, disci
αὐτός
Article theλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἐνἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theοὐNeg
ἀλλήλων
τίςIrgλέγωI say, speakμήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπρός · 700× in the New Testament
Luke Acts John Mark Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Hebrews Romans Ephesians 1 Thessalonians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.3c. AD 100

τούτων οὖν μενόντων τὰ πρὸς κύριον ἁγνῶς, συνευφραίνονται αὐτοῖς σοφία, σύνεσις, ἐπιστήμη, γνῶσις.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 28Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)109 BC

r … πυρὸν νέον καθαρὸν ἄδολον μέτρωι ὧι καὶ παρείληφεν καὶ ἀποκαθεστάμενον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιῆ

P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

παρεχέτω τὸν οἶνον μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου κεραμίου

P.Grenf. 1 30Pathyris104 BC

πᾶσι χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διὰ παντὸς εὐημερεῖν. ὑγιαίνομεν δὲ καὶ αὐτοί. μεταλαβόντες τοὺς συντετελεσμένους πρὸς τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς Ἑρμωνθίτας ἀγῶνας μεγάλως ἐχάρημεν. ἐπεὶ οὖν προκεχειρίκαμεν προστάτην τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
τὰςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APF — Article · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
συναγωγάς,sunagōgē synagogues, G4864 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
56× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to a gathering or assembly of people, like a synagogue in Luke 12:11 and Acts 9:2. It can also describe a Christian church, emphasizing the idea of people coming together. The Bible uses this word to describe both Jewish and Christian assemblies.
Amplified meaning
gatherings, assemblies
Tyndale gloss
synagogue
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word συναγωγή (i.e., *sunagoge*) means a gathering or assembly, particularly in a religious context. It denotes both the act of assembling and the place where such gatherings occur, especially Jewish synagogues, as well as Christian congregations. The term is derived from the verb meaning 'to bring together' and is used in the New Testament to refer to various types of assemblies, including those for worship and community purposes.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — Ἔκκλησία, συναγωγή, πανήγυρις from a scan

THERE are words whose history it is peculiarly interesting to watch, as they obtain a deeper meaning, and receive a new consecration in the Christian Church; words which the Church did not invent, but has assumed into its service, and employed in a far loftier sense than any to which the world has ever put them before. The very word by which the Church is named is itself an example—a more illustrious one could scarcely be found—of this progressive ennobling of a word.' For we have ἐκκλησία in three distinct stages of meaning—the heathen, the Jewish, and the Christian. In respect of the first, ἡ ἐκκλησία (ΞΞἔκκλητοι, Euripides, Orestes, ‘ Zezschwitz, in his very interesting Lecture, Profangrdcitét und Biblischer Sprachgeist, Leipzig, 1859, p. 5, has said excellently well, ‘ Das Christenthum wiire nicht als was es siegend iiber Griechenthum und Romerthum sich ausgewiesen, hitte es zu…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

συν-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ

[in LXX chiefly for עֵדָה, also for קהל, etc. ;]

prop., a bringing together;

of things,

a gathering in of harvest;

a collection of money.

Of persons,

a collecting, assembling (Polyb.);

an assembly (MM, xxiv; Deiss., LAE, 101 ff.): Re 2:9 3:9; esp. of a Jewish religious assembly, a synagogue: Lk 12:11, Ac 9:2, al.; of a Christian assembly, Ja 2:2. By meton., of the building in which the assembly is held, a synagogue: Mt 10:17, Mk 1:21, al. (cf. Cremer, s.v. ἐκκλησία)

SYN.: ἐκκλησία (q.v.)

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

συν-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (συνάγω), Sept. for oP and very often for ΤΠ}. In Grk. writ. α bringing together, gathering (as of fruits), a contracting; an assembling together of men. In the N. T. 1. an assembly of men: τοῦ Σατανᾶ, whom Satan governs, Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9. 2. α synagogue, i. e. a. an assembly of Jews formally gathered together to offer prayer and listen to the reading and exposition of the Holy Scriptures; assemblies of the sort were held every sabbath and feast-day, afterwards also on the second and fifth days of every week [see reff. below]: Lk. xii. 11; Acts ix. 2; xiil.43; xxvi. 11; the name is transferred to an assembly of Christians formally gathered for religious purposes, Jas. ii. 2 (Epiph. haer. 30, 18 says of the Jewish Christians συναγωγὴν οὗτοι καλοῦσι THY ἑαυτῶν ἐκκλησίαν καὶ οὐχὶ ἐκκλησίαν [ cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. p. 192]); [ef. Trench, Syn. § 1, and esp. Harnack’s…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

συναγωγή. (1) For συναγωγή in its literal sense of ‘‘a drawing together” cf. the description of the awning of a boat in P Cairo Zen I. 590548 (B.C. 257) πρυμνητικὴ. . . ἔχουσᾳ συναγωγὴν εἰς πήχεις Ὑ, ie. ‘‘converging for a distance of three cubits”’ (Edd.) ; also 31, 85. (2) Hence, more generally, ‘a collecting,” ‘‘a gathering ’ (a) of things—P Cairo Zen IT. 59173°° (B.C. 255 or 254) ws ἂν ἡ] συναγωγὴ τοῦ σίτου [γένηται, Chrest. 1. 304° (ili/B.c.) εἰς τὴν συνα]γωγὴν τοῦ λοιποῦ (sv. κρότωνος), Chrest. I. 155° (a book catalogue from Memphis—beg. ili/A.b.): Σωκ[ρα]τικῶν ἐπιστο[λ(ῶν)] cvvaywyal: cf. Cic. ad Adz. ΧΥΪ, 5. 5 mearum epistularum nulla est συναγωγή. (0) Of persons. The use of συναγωγή in the LXX to denote an ‘‘assembly” for religious purposes, practically synonymous with ἐκκλησία, is prepared for by such passages 27 66 > where συναγωγή is used of the ‘‘assembling” of the θίασος…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

συναγωγή (sunagōgē) — synagogue.

συνᾰγωγ-ή, ἡ,

a bringing together:

I. of persons, ἀνδρὸς καὶ γυναικός [Refs 5th c.BC+]; collecting, ὄχλων, ἀνδρῶν, etc., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; assembling, meeting, τῶν λογιστῶν [Refs]

I.2. assembly, [LXX+2nd c.BC+]; τῶν συνέδρων [Refs 1st c.BC+]; place of assembly, especially of the Jewish synagogue, [NT]; meeting-house, Μαρκιωνιστῶν [Refs 4th c.AD+]; conventicle, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

II. of things, σ. [τῶν ἐκπεπταμένων] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to διαιρέσεις, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σ. πολέμου levying of war, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; gathering in of harvest, τοῦ σίτου [LXX+3rd c.BC+]; πύου Heras cited in [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; harvest, ἑορτὴ συναγωγῆς [LXX]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

συναγωγή

sunagoge

from (the reduplicated form of) 4863; an assemblage of persons;

specially, a Jewish "synagogue" (the meeting or the place); by

analogy, a Christian church:--assembly, congregation, synagogue.

see GREEK for 4863

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

συναγωγή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

an assembly, congregation, synagogue

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

συναγωγή synagōgē 56x

a collecting, gathering; a Christian assembly or congregation, Jas. 2:2; the congregation of a synagogue, Acts 9:2; hence, the place itself, a synagogue, Lk. 7:5

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

συναγωγή συνα^γωγή, ἡ, from συνάγω a bringing together, uniting, Plat.

a place of assembly, synagogue, NTest.

ς. πολέμου a levying of war, Thuc.

a gathering in of harvest, Polyb.

a drawing together, contracting, ς. στρατιᾶς a forming an army in column, Plat.; ς. τοῦ προσώπου a pursing up or wrinkling of the face, Isocr.

a collection of writings, Arist.

a conclusion, inference, id. Arist.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Places in which the Jews assembled for worship

Ac 13:5,14

- Early notice of their existence

Ps 74:8

- Probably originated in the schools of the prophets

1Sa 19:18-24; 2Ki 4:23

- Revival of, after the captivity

Ne 8:1-8

- SERVICE OF, CONSISTED OF

. Prayer

Mt 6:5

. Reading the word of God

Ne 8:18; 9:3; 13:1; Ac 15:21

. Expounding the word of God

Ne 8:8; Lu 4:21

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Christ and his Disciples Teach in

Joh 6:59; 18:20; Ac 13:5; 14:1; 18:19

(2) General References to

Mt 10:17; Lu 12:11; Joh 9:22; 16:2; Ac 26:11

(3) Attendance upon

Mt 12:9; Mr 1:21; Lu 4:16; Ac 13:14; Heb 10:25

--SEE Attendance upon the Sanctuary, WORSHIP, TRUE

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
56%synagogue
synagogue56% · 32×synagogues42% · 24×other renderings2% · 1×

57 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial71%object13%subject9%predicate7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 56 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνεἰςἐκ
εἰς
πάλινagain, further, καίand, even, also,εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
ἐν
λέγωI say, speakδιδάσκωI teach
εἰμίI am, exist
ὅπουwhere, whither
ἀλλάbut, except
εἰμίI am, exist
συναγωγήsynagogues,56×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐνArticle theπρωτοκλισίαthe chief place
Article the
ἸουδαῖοςJewishΣατανᾶςan adversary, SaἸουδαίαJudea
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,μαστιγόωI flog, scourgeὥστεso that, therefo
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἀνήρa male human bei
διδάσκωI teach
ἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσυναγωγή · 56× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew Mark John Revelation James
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 158 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 67c. AD 40

„ἐπισκεψάσθω κύριος ὁ θεὸς τῶν πνευμάτων καὶ πάσης σαρκὸς ἄνθρωπον ἐπὶ τῆς συναγωγῆς ταύτης, ὅστις ἐξελεύσεται πρὸ προσώπου αὐτῶν καὶ ὅστις εἰσελεύσεται, καὶ ὅστις ἐξάξει αὐτοὺς καὶ ὅστις εἰσάξει, καὶ οὐκ ἔσται ἡ συναγωγὴ κυρίου ὡσεὶ πρόβατα οἷς οὐκ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.10c. AD 75–95

Εὗρον τοίνυν, ὅτι Πτολεμαίων μὲν ὁ δεύτερος μάλιστα δὴ βασιλεὺς περὶ παιδείαν καὶ βιβλίων συναγωγὴν σπουδάσας ἐξαιρέτως ἐφιλοτιμήθη τὸν ἡμέτερον νόμον καὶ τὴν κατʼ αὐτὸν διάταξιν τῆς πολιτείας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φωνὴν μεταβαλεῖν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.6c. AD 100

Περιέσχεν με συναγωγὴ πονηρευομένων, ἐκύκλωσάν με ὡσεὶ μέλισσαι κηρίον, καί: Ἐπὶ τὸν ἱματισμόν μου ἔβαλον κλῆρον.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 1st c. BC 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD
P.Lond. 7 219370 BC–59 BC

τοῖς ἀνήκουσι τῶι κοινῶι καὶ παρέσονται ἐπὶ τὰς δοθησομένας αὐτοῖς παραγγελίας καὶ συνλόγους καὶ συναγωγὰς καὶ ἀποδημίας καὶ μηδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐξέστω συνπε … ματαρχηισειν μηδὲ σχίσματα συνίστασθαι μηδʼ ἀποχωρήσειν

P.Lond. 2 p. 163-165 no. 354Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites8 BC–5 BC

γεωργίων ἀφανιζομένων … … ας … … … ν προεῖδον ἀλόγευτον καθεστάναι τῆς τε συναγωγῆς … ου καιροῦ ἀξιοῦμεν γράψαι τῷ τοῦ νομοῦ στρατηγῷ ἐκλυσαμένῳ ἡμᾶς τῆς συνοχῆς καὶ

BGU 4 1137Alexandria7 BC

ἔτους κε Καίσαρος Ἁθὺρ κβ, ἐπὶ τῆς γενηθείσης συναγωγῆς ἐν τῷ Παρατόμωι συνόδου Σεβαστῆς τοῦ θεοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος ἧς συναγωγὸς καὶ προστάτης Πρῖμος

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ὅπωςhopōs so that G3704 Adverb
53× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'that' or 'how' and is used to show the manner or purpose of something, like in Matthew 6:2 and Acts 9:17. It can also mean 'in order that' or 'to the end that'.
Tyndale gloss
that
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅπως (i.e., *hopōs*) serves as both a relative adverb and a conjunction. It conveys meanings related to manner, purpose, or design, often translated as 'how' or 'in order that.' The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including Matthew 6:2 and Luke 24:20. Notably, it can appear with different verb tenses and moods, indicating its flexible grammatical role.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅπως.

Relat. adv. of manner, as, how: c. indic., Lk 24:20.

Conj., c. subjc. (in cl. also c. opt., indic.: so in Mt 26:59, LT, Tr.), in order that, to the end that, that;

final, denoting purpose or design (in which the original idea of modality has been merged): after pres., Mt 6:2, al.; pf., Ac 9:17, al.; impf., Ac 9:24; aor., Ac 9:2, al.; plpf., Jo 11:57; fut., Mt 23:35; imperat., Mt 2:8, al.; ὅ. μή (M, Pr., 185),

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅπως, (fr. πῶς and the relat. ὁ), with the indicative, a relat. adverb but, like the Lat. ut, assuminz also the nature of a conjunction [οἵ. W. 449 (418 sq.) ]. aE As an Adverb; as, in what manner, how; once so in the N. T. in an indir. question, with the indie.: οὐκ ἔγνως, ὅπως κτλ. Lk. xxiv. 20, where cf. Bornemann, Scholia ete. Ir. A Conjunction, Lat. ut, answering to the Germ. dass, that; in class. Grk. with the optat., and subjunc., and fut. indic.; ef. esp. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 681 sqq. But the distinction observed between these constructions by the more elegant Grk. writ. is quite neglected in the N. T., and if we except Mt. xxvi. 59 L TTr (ὅπως θανατώσουσιν), [1 Co. i. 29 Ree.*!7], only the subjunctive follows this particle (for in Mk. v. 23, for ὅπως . . . ζήσεται, L txt. T Tr WH have correctly restored iva... ζήσῃ); cf. W. 289 (271); B. 233 (201) sq.; [214 (185) ]. 1. It…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὅπως. (1) An interesting use of ὅπως, in which it is virtually a conjunction = ‘‘in which case,”’ is seen in such passages as P Tebt II. 414°? (ii/a.D.) ἡ Anvé(= ὶ)ς Tod ᾿Αγαθανγέλου ἐστίν, ὅπως τοῖς παιδίοζιδς δοθῇ, ‘‘the trough belongs to Agathangelus, so let it be given to the children ’’ (Edd.). See further Pro/eg. p. 177 nt. (2) For ὅπως, like πῶς, used in the sense of ὡς, ὅτι (cf. Blass Gr. p. 230f.), we may recall the letter of the prodigal BGU III. 846*® (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 95) οὐκ οἶδες, ὅτι θέλω πηρὸς γενέσται, εἰ γνοῦναι, ὅπως ἀνθρόπῳ [ἔ]τ[ι] ὀφείλω ὀβολόν ; “do you not know that I would rather be a cripple than be conscious that I am still owing anyone an obolus?’’ Deissmann (LAE, p. 179 n.*8) finds a beginning of this usage in Lk 247°, the only place in the NT where ὅπως is construed with the ind. (but cf. Mt 2655. A). A good ex. of ὅπως c. ind. from the papyri is…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅπως (hopōs) — that.

ὅπως,

Epic dialect also and Aeolic dialect ὅππως, Ionic dialect ὅκως, Doric dialect ὁπῶς accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+] adverb of Manner, Relat. as, in such manner as, and with interrogative force how, in what manner, rarely indefinite, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__B FINAL CONJUNCTION, in such a manner that, in order that. adverb of Manner, how, as:

__B.I Relat. to ὥς or οὕτως (like ὡς), in such manner as, as:

__B.I.1 with the ordinary Constr. of the Relat.:

__B.I.1.a with indicative, ἦ τοι νόστον, ὅπως φρεσὶ σῇσι μενοινᾷς, ὥς τοι Ζεὺς τελέσειεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] adverb, με τοῖον ἔθηκεν, ὅπως (for οἷον)[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὅ. ἔχω as I am, on the spot, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅπως

hopos

from 3739 and 4459; what(-ever) how, i.e. in the manner that (as

adverb or conjunction of coincidence, intentional or

actual):--because, how, (so) that, to, when.

see GREEK for 3739

see GREEK for 4459

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅπως

Adv

how, in order that, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅπως hopōs 53x

can function as a conj., how, in what way or manner, by what means, Mt. 22:5; Lk. 24:20; conj. that, in order that, and ὅπως μή, that not, lest, Mt. 6:2, 4, 5, 16, 18; Acts 9:2, et al. freq.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

so (co', although the Hebrew might be pointed cewe'; Assyrian Sib'u; Septuagint Segor, Soa; Manetho, Seuechos; Latin Sevechus; Herodotus (ii. 137 ff), Sabakon): In all probability the "Sabaeo" of Herodotus, the Shabaka, who founded the Ethiopian dynasty, the XXVth of Egyptian kings. His date is given as 715-707 BC (Flinders Petrie, History of Egypt, III, 281 ff), but we may suppose that before his accession to the throne he was entitled to be designated king, as being actually regent. To this So, Hoshea, king of Israel, made an appeal for assistance to enable him to throw off the yoke of the Assyrian Shalmaneser IV (2Ki 17:3). But Hoshea's submission to So brought him no advantage, for Shalmaneser came up throughout all the land and laid siege to Samaria. Not long after the fall of Samaria, So ventured upon an eastern campaign, and…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

So

(Nubian, Sabako), an Ethiopian king who brought Egypt under his sway. He was bribed by Hoshea to help him against the Assyrian monarch Shalmaneser (2 Kings 17:4). This was a return to the policy that had been successful in the reign of Jeroboam I.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

"So, king of Egypt," is once mentioned in the Bible -- (2 Kings 17:4) So has been identified by different writers with the first and second kings of the Ethiopian twenty-fifth dynasty, called by Manetho, Sabakon (Shebek) and Sebichos (Shebetek).

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

King of Egypt, made an alliance with Hoshea king of Israel, and promised him assistance; but was unable to prevent Shalmaneser king of Assyria from taking Samaria and subverting the kingdom, B. C. 721, 2Ki 17:4. See PHARAOH.

So is believed to have been the Servetus or Sabaco II of secular history, the second king of the Ethiopian or twenty-fifth dynasty, and the predecessor of Trihakah. A singular fact has been brought to light by the recent explorations at Nineveh, corroborating the Scripture record the more forcibly, because unexpected and direct. The Bible shows that Egypt and Assyria, though remote, were often in conflict during the height of the Assyrian ruins power, and that So was at war with Shalmaneser. After war comes the treaty of peace; and as the Bible prepares us to suppose such treaties were made, the Assyrian ruins…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
72%so that
so that72% · 38×that23% · 12×how6% · 3×

53 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object8%adverbial6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 53 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
κατάπρόσωπονthe face, counteἐρωτάωI ask, question,
ἐγώ
ἀπαγγέλλωI report, bring ἁμαρτίαa sin
θερισμόςreaping, harvest
Article the
σύ
ἐρωτάωI ask, question,ἐξεγείρωI raise up, arou
ΝαζαράProp
λέγωI say, speak
ὅπωςso that53×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,παγιδεύωI ensnare, entraθανατόωI put to death,
ἄνDisj
ἀποκαλύπτωI uncover, bringἔρχομαιI come, goἐκζητέωI seek out, requ
Article the
θέλωI will, wish, deἀνάκρισιςjudicial examinaκοινωνίαparticipation, c
πληρόωI fill, fulfill, com
Article the
μήNeg
φαίνωI shine, appear,γίνομαιI come into beinκαυχάομαιI boast, glory

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅπως · 53× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 2 Thessalonians Galatians James John
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 112 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 58c. AD 40

γεγόνασι δ’ ὅπερ αὐτὸς εἶπεν οὐ μόνον, ἵνα φῶς ἐκπέμπωσιν ἐπὶ γῆν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅπως σημεῖα μελλόντων προφαίνωσιν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 10.2c. AD 96

οὗτος δἰ ὑπακοῆς ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τῆς γῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐκ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ, ὅπως γῆν ὀλίγην καὶ συγγένειαν ἀσθενῆ καὶ οἶκον μικρὸν καταλιπὼν κληρονομήσῃ τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τοῦ θεοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 43Thebais201 BC–102 BC

αὐτοῦ δὲ μηδʼ ἀποδεδωκότος ἡμῖν μηδὲ ἵππον μηδὲ τὴν πορείαν αὐτῆς ἐπιδεδωκότος, ἐγράψαμέν σοι, ὅπως οὖν εἰδῆις. ἔρρωσο. καλῶς οὖν ποιήσεις ἀγοράσας ἐμοί τε πορφύρας στατῆρας δύο καὶ Ἀφροδισίαι

αὐτοῦ … ἐὰν φαίνηται μεταδόνθʼ ἡμῖν τῶν παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρώπων συντάξαι γράψαι οἷς καθήκει ὅπως μὴ περισπώμεθα ἐπὶ τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα κριτήρια, εἰ δέ τι οἴεται ἐπὶ τοῦ Σαντοβίθυος

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς Θηβαίδος. ὅπως οὖν εἰδότες εὐθαρσεῖς ὑπάρχητε ἐκρίναμεν σημῆναι. ἔρρωσθε ἔτους λ Φαῶφι ιθ

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ἐάνean if G1437 Conditional particle
339× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'if' and is used to show uncertainty or possibility, as in Matthew 6:22 and Romans 2:25, to express conditions or circumstances.
Tyndale gloss
if
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἐάν is a conditional particle formed from εἰ (if) and ἄν. It indicates uncertainty or a hypothetical situation, often followed by the subjunctive mood. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as in Matthew 6:22 and Romans 2:25. It can also appear with other particles, enhancing its conditional meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν,

conditional particle,

representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ c. ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jo 13:17, I Co 7:36), if haply, if;

c. subjc. (cl.);

pres.: Mt 6:22, Lk 10:6, Jo 7:17, Ro 2:25, 26 al.;

aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mt 4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Lk 9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mk 3:24, Lk 14:34, Jo 5:43,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐάν ; I. aconditional particle (derived fr. εἰ ἄν), which makes reference to time and to experience, introducing something future, but not determining, before the event, whether it is certainly to take place; if, in case, (Lat. si; Germ. wenn; im Fall, dass; falls; wofern); οἴ.» among others, Hermann ad Viger. p.832; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p- 450 sqq.; W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with the Subjunctive, according to the regular usage of the more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the subjunc. Present: Mt. vi. 22 (ἐὰν οὖν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ἁπλοῦς 7, if it be the case, as to which I do not know, that thine eye etc.); ibid. 23; xvii. 20; Lk. x. 6; Jn. vii. 17; viii. 54 [RGL mrg.]; ix. 31; xi. 9,10; Acts v. 38; xiii. 41; Ro. ii. 25 sq.; 1 Co.ix.16; Gal. v. 2; 1 Tim. i. 8 [not Lehm.]; Heb. xiii. 23; 1 Jn. i. 9; ii. 3, 15 ete. Ὁ. with the subjunc. Aorist, corresponding to the Lat.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐάν (ean) — if.

ἐάν

(so early Attic Inscrr., as [Refs 4th c.BC+], also contraction ἤν and ἄν, see at {ἤν},{ἄν} (B) [ᾱ], which by crasis with καί become κἄν:—if haply, if, regularly followed by subjunctive: for its use and for examples, see at {εἰ} [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. in Hellenistic and late Greek, ={ἄν} after relative Pronouns and Conjunctions, as ὃς ἐάν whosoever, [LXX+5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐάν ἐάνπερ

ean

from 1487 and 302; a conditional particle; in case that, provided,

etc.; often used in connection with other particles to denote

indefiniteness or uncertainty:--before, but, except, (and) if, (if)

so, (what-, whither-)soever, though, when (-soever), whether (or), to

whom, (who-)so(-ever). See 3361.

see GREEK for 1487

see GREEK for 302

see GREEK for 3361

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐάν

Cond.

if

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐάν ean 350x

if, ἐὰν μή, except, unless; also equivalent to ἀλλά, Gal. 2:16. Ἐάν, in NT as in the later Greek, is substituted for ἄν after relative words, Mt. 5:19. Tends to be an indicator for the subjunctive mood.

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐάν compounded of εἰ ἄν ἐα?ν contracts into ἤν and ἄν if haply, if, followed by subj. (whereas εἰ is foll. by ind. or opt.), epic εἴ κε, αἴ κε.

in NTest. ἐάν is used just like the adverb ἄν after relative Pronouns and Conjunctions, as ὃς ἐάν whosoever, ὅσος ἐάν, ὅστις ἐάν, ὅπου ἐάν, etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
COND — Conditional particle
conditional particle — it marks the clause as a condition.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

COND CONDitional particle or conjunction

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
74%if
if74% · 255×only14% · 49×maybe8% · 26×other renderings4% · 15×

345 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial11%subject8%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 339 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὅς
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existδῶρονa gift, present
καίand, even, also, nam
ἁμαρτάνωI sinεἷςoneαὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύαὐτόςγάρfor
σύ
λέγωI say, speakπρόςποιέωI do, make
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἐπίδέbut, on the othe
ἐάνif339×
what comes after →
μήNeg
μετανοέωI repent, changeτὶςεἰμίI am, exist
τὶς
σύἀδελφόςa brotherArticle the
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,Article theμήNeg
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastφωνήa sound, noise, ἐντολήan ordinance, in
θέλωI will, wish, desire
δύναμαιI am powerful, aArticle theἵναin order that, s

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐάν · 339× in the New Testament
Matthew John 1 Corinthians Mark Luke 1 John Romans Acts Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 746 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 79c. AD 40

τουτὶ δὲ συμβήσεται, ἐὰν μήτε αἱ ἄλογοι ἡδοναὶ ψυχῆς δυναστεύσωσι γαστριμαργίαν καὶ λαγνείαν ἐπιτειχίσασαι μήτε αἱ δόξης ἢ χρημάτων ἢ ἀρχῆς ἐπιθυμίαι τὸ τοῦ βίου κράτος ἀνάψωνται μήτε στείλωσι καὶ κάμψωσι διάνοιαν αἱ λῦπαι μήθ’ ὁ κακὸς σύμβουλος…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.252c. AD 75–95

ἐὰν δέ που μόνῃ περιπεσὼν βιάσηται μηδενὸς βοηθοῦ παρόντος, μόνος ἀποθνησκέτω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Adl. 10Pathyris102 BC

δεδανεισμένος Πανᾶς Ἀγαθίνωι καὶ Πατῆτι τοῖς δανείζουσιν ἐν μηνὶ Ἐπεὶφ εἰκάδος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἀποτεισάτω καθὰ γέγραπται παραχρῆμα ἐπάναγκον· ἡ δὲ

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ποιησάτω ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ιε ἔτους, καὶ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστης ἀρτάβης πυροῦ ἧς ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδῶι χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας τετρακοσίας , κριθῆς χιλίας τετρακοσίας , καὶ ἑβδόμην μερίδα

P.Adl. 19Pathyris99 BC

τοῦτο ἀποδότω ὁ δεδανεισμένος τῶι δανείζοντι ἐν μηνὶ Μεσορὴ λ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ιϛ ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιήσηι καθὰ γέγραπται ἀποτεισάτω ἐν

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
τιναςtis any G5100 Indefinite pronoun · accusative · plural · masculine
529× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing in a general sense, as seen in Luke 9:49 and John 11:1. It can mean someone, anyone, or anything. This term is often used to describe an unspecified individual or object.
Tyndale gloss
one
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τὶς is an enclitic indefinite pronoun meaning 'someone' or 'something.' It can refer to a certain person or object and appears in both singular and plural forms, such as τινός and τινες. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including Luke 9:49 and Acts 5:25. It is related to the interrogative pronoun τίς, indicating its flexible use in questions and statements.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τις, neut., τι, gen., τινός,

enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε.

As subst.,

one, a certain one: Lk 9:49, Jo 11:1, Ac 5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Lk 13:1, Ac 15:1, Ro 3:8, al.

someone, anyone, something, anything: Mt 12:29, Mk 9:30, Lk 8:46, Jo 2:25, Ac 17:25, Ro…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τὶς, τὶ. ἘΣ what follows, εἰ καί lays less emphasis upon it; although it is evident that εἰ καί can often be substituted for καὶ ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413); Ellic. on Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, § 41; Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. εἰ μή, a. in a conditional protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses as the simple εἰ, see 1. above, if not, unless, except, [W. 477 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33; | xv. 22, 24; Ro. vii. 7, ete. b. it serves, with the entire. following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308) ]: Mk. vi. 5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition εἰ μὴ ἑκάστῳ κτλ. strives to prevent any one in applying what had been said a little while before, viz. οὐ δεδούλωται . . ἐν τοιούτοις to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironical answers, unless…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τις (indef. pron.), ‘* someone, something’’: P Vat ΑἸ (B.c. 168) (= UPZi. p. 303) πᾶς τις πειρᾶται. . ., P Lond 421° (B.C. 168) (= Selections, p. 10) εἰς πᾶν τι ἐληλυθυῖα διὰ, τὴν τοῦ σίτου τιμήν, ‘having come to the last extremity because of the high price of corn,’’ P Oxy IV. 7421° (B.c. 2) ἐάν τι δύνῃ... δὸς ἐργασίαν, “if you can, give your attention to it’’ (Edd.), 2d. I. 120% (iv/a.D.) τινα ὁρῶντα αἱαυτὸν (/. ἑαυτὸν) ἐν δυστυχίᾳ, ““α man finding himself in adversity,’ 13 ἀποστῖλόν pot τινα ἢ Γοῦνθον ἢ ᾿Αμμώνιον, “send someone to me, either Gunthus or Ammonius” (Edd.). P Oxy VI. 937°" (ili/A.D.) γ]ράψον ἐκεῖ TO kat’ εἶδος ὅτι τι kal τι εἴληφας is translated by the editors ‘* write the list there, that you have received so and so.” They 3) ες remark that it is simpler to take τι καί τι as analogous to τὸ καὶ τό than ‘‘to take τί kal τί as an indirect interrogative, ὅτι being…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τις (tis) — one.

τις,

τι, Indef. pronoun any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions see below):—but τί; τί; Interrog. pronoun who? what?, oxytone in the monosyllable cases, paroxytone in the others:—Dialectal forms: [Refs 5th c.AD+] σις (si se) [Refs 4th c.AD+] σις (with ?? for σ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Thess. κις [Refs], neuter κι in διεκί, ποκκί (which see); neuter plural Doric dialect σά, Boeotian dialect τά, Aeolic dialect dative τίω, τίοισι (see. infr. B). (I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] q[uglide]i-, cf. Latin quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, see at {ἄσσα}, σά μά; with τέο (see. infr. B) cf. OSlav. genitive česo)

__A Indef. pronoun τις, τι, genitive Ionic dialect τεο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τευ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect του [Refs 5th c.BC+]; του is rare after [NT+4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τὶς

tis

an enclitic indefinite pronoun; some or any person or object:--a (kind

of), any (man, thing, thing at all), certain (thing), divers, he

(every) man, one (X thing), ought, + partly, some (man, -body, -

thing, -what), (+ that no-)thing, what(-soever), X wherewith,

whom(-soever), whose(-soever).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τις, τι

Indef.pr.

any one, some one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τις tis 534x

enclitic, indefinite pronoun, a certain one, someone, Mt. 12:47; pl. some, certain, several, Lk. 8:2; Acts 9:19; 2 Pet. 3:16; one, a person, Mt. 12:29; Lk. 14:8; Jn. 6:50; combined with the name of an individual, one, Mk. 15:21; as it were in a manner, a kind of, Heb. 10:27; Jas. 1:18; any whatever, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Indef-APM — Indefinite pronoun · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

X-APM Part of Speech: indefinite pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
27%anyone
anyone27% · 144×some19% · 102×certain17% · 93×anything9% · 48×any9% · 47×one6% · 34×someone4% · 19×something3% · 18×other renderings7% · 37×

542 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 35 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject66%object20%adverbial9%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 530 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰCond
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὅτιthat, since, bec
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰCondεἰμίI am, existλέγωI say, speak
ἐάνCond
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakἐγώ
μήNeg
ἵναin order that, sἐάνCondβλέπωI look, see
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςΦαρισαῖοςa Phariseeὁδόςa way, road, jou
τὶςany529×
what comes after →
Article the
γραμματεύςa scribe, town-cμαθητήςa learner, disciἀπό
σύ
λέγωI say, speakπλανάωI lead astray, dἐρωτάωI ask, question,
αὐτός
ἐκὁράωI see, look uponἀπό
ἐκ
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐνπλούσιοςrichὑδρωπικόςafflicted with d

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτὶς · 529× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John 1 Corinthians Mark 2 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew 1 Timothy Romans James Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 121 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν· μὴ ἐξέστω δὲ τῷ καθόλου ἐπὶ τὴν διαθήκην ταύτην ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἐπέρχεσθαι, εἰ δὲ μὴ ἄκυρον ἔστω καὶ προσαποτεισάτω ὁ ἐπιφέρων ὕστερον … ἄλλον τῆς

P.Cair. Cat. 10364 descr.Pathyris126 BC–102 BC

προγεγραμμένου ἵππου, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαί σοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ. ἐὰν δὲ ἐπέλθωμεν ἢ ἄλλος τις ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἥ τʼ ἔφοδος ἄκυρος ἔσται καὶ προσαποτείσομέν σοι χαλκοῦ τάλαντα πέντε.

BGU 6 1260Pathyris102 BC

σημαινομένης ἀρούρης μιᾶς , καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσασθαι Νεχθανοῦπιν καὶ τοὺς τούτου υἱοὺς μηδʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τὸν Πετεαρσεμθεία μηδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
εὕρῃehuriskō he shall find G2147 Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · singular
176× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To find or discover something, like in Matthew 7:7-8, where Jesus teaches that those who seek will find. This word is about searching and finding, whether it's a physical object or a spiritual truth.
Amplified meaning
discovered, met
Tyndale gloss
to find/meet
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εὑρίσκω (i.e., *heuriskō*) means 'to find' and can refer to both literal and figurative discoveries. It encompasses a range of meanings from locating something after a search to acquiring knowledge or understanding. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as finding people or truths (e.g., Matthew 7:7). The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εὑρίσκω,

[in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;]

to find, with or without previous search: absol., opp. to ζητέω, Mt 7:7, 8 Lk 11:9, 10; c. acc., Mt 2:8, Mk 1:37, Ac 13:22, II Ti 1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, He 11:5, Re 16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, v. Mayor, ICC, in l.), II Pe 3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaph.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εὑρίσκω ; impf. εὕρισκον (Mk. xiv. 55 [RG ΤΊ; Lk. xix. 48 [RG‘I’]; Acts vii. 11 [exe. Tr WH]) and more rarely ηὕρισκον (cf. Kiihner § 343, i. 825 sq. [esp. Veitch s. v. fin. ] and reff. under evdoxéw) ; fut. εὑρήσω; pf. εὕρηκα; 1 aor. εὕρησα (which aor., unknown to the earlier Grks., occurs in Aesop. f. 131 [f. 41 ed. Furia, p. 333 ed. Cor.]; Maneth. 5, 137 and in Byzant. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 721; W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 36 (31)]), Rev. xviii. 14 Ree. ; 2 aor. εὗρον, 1 pers. plur. in Alex. form | WH. App. Ρ. 164; B. 39 (34); W. § 13,1 (see ἀπέρχομαι) | εὕραμεν, Lk. xxiii. 2 T Tr WH, 3 pers. plur. εὗραν, Lk. viii. 35 Tr WH; Acts v. 10 Tr (in Sept. often εὕροσαν) ; Pass., pres. εὑρίσκομαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing. εὑρίσκετο, Heb. xi. 5 RG, ηὑρίσκετο 1, Τ Tr WH, (cf. Bleek and Delitzsch ad loe. [Veitch u. 5.7); 1 aor. εὑρέθην ; fut. εὑρεθήσομαι ; 2 aor. mid. εὑρόμην and later εὑράμην (Heb.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εὑρίσκω. P Hib I. 485 (B.c. 255) οὐ γὰρ εὑρίσκω ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις, “for I cannot find the entry in the books” (Edd.), P Tebt I. 58° (B.c. 111) εὑρήκαμεν δὲ τὸν ἐπιδεδωκότα τὸ ὑπόμνηίμα), P Oxy IIT. 53218 (ii/A.D.) καὶ γὰρ ἐν Iladpe τότε σε εὗρον, P Iand 81 (ii/A.D.) ἐὰν τὸ χυτρί]ον εὕρωι (for form cf. Mayser Gr. p. 134 f.), διαπέμψ[ομαι διὰ το]ῦ ὀνολάτου dpep(pve[s: cf. for the passive P Rein 111} (B.c. 111) διὰ τὸ τοῦτον ἐκπεπτωκέναι Kal μὴ εὑρίσκεσθαι, ‘because this man has left the country and is not to be found,” P Oxy IV. 743% (B.C. 2) καὶ εὑρέθη μήτε εἰληφὼς μήτε δεδωκώ(ς), “it was discovered that he had neither received nor paid anything,” and P Giss I. 47* (Hadrian) λείαν ἄξια εὑρῆσθαι. For a weaker sense, as in Mt 2737 a/., see P Tebt II. 3305 (ii/A.D.) παραγενομένου εἰς τὴν κώμην εὗρον τὴν οἰκίαν μου σεσυλημένην, P Gen I. 54%! (iv/A.D.) ἀπελθόντων ἡμῶν ἐκεῖσαι εὑρήκαμεν τὸν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εὑρίσκω (ehuriskō) — to find/meet.

εὑρίσκω,

imperfect ηὕρισκον or εὕρ- [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future εὑρήσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 2 εὗρον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εὕροσαν [LXX+1st c.AD+]; Epic dialect infinitive εὑρέμεναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: later aorist 1 εὕρησα [Refs 4th c.AD+]; εὗρα variant in [NT+2nd c.AD+]: perfect εὕρηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+], perfect imperative 2nd pers. singular εὕρηκε [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future εὑρήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 2 εὑρόμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 εὑράμην [NT+8th c.BC+]:—passive, future εὑρεθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ηὑρέθην or εὑρέθην [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.: perfect ηὕρημαι or εὕρ- [Refs 8th c.BC+] has only aorist active and middle, except ἔθ᾽ εὑρίσκω (variant{ἐφευρίσκω}) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: the augment is seldom found in Papyri, ηὕρισκεν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; never in those of [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—find, εὗρεν δ᾽…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εὑρίσκω

heurisko

heuro hyoo'-ro, which

(together with another cognate form)

heureo hyoo-reh'-o is used for it in all the tenses

except the present and imperfect

to find (literally or figuratively):--find, get, obtain, perceive,

see.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εὑρίσκω

v.

I find

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εὑρίσκω heuriskō 176x

to find, to meet with; Mt. 18:28; 20:6; to find out, to detect, discover, Lk. 23:2, 4, 14; to acquire, obtain, win, gain, Lk. 1:30; 9:12; to find mentally, to comprehend, recognize, Acts 17:27; Rom. 7:21; to find by experience, observe, gather, Rom. 7:18; to devise as feasible, Lk. 5:19; 19:48

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εὑρίσκω to find, Hom., etc.:—c. part. to find that, Hdt.; and in Pass., ἢν εὑρεθῆις δίκαιος ὤν Soph.

c. inf., εὕρισκε πρῆγμά οἱ εἶναι found that the thing for him was, Hdt.

to find out, discover, Hom., etc.; cf. εὕρημα II:—so in Mid. to find out for oneself, Od.

to devise, invent, Aesch., etc.:—Mid., τὰ δ᾽ ἔργα τοὺς λόγους εὑρίσκεται deeds make themselves words, i. e. speak for themselves, Soph.

to find, get, gain, procure, Pind., Soph., etc.:—Mid. to get for oneself, bring on oneself, κακὸν εὕρετο Od.; αὐτὸς εὑρόμην πόνους Aesch.

of merchandise, to find a purchaser, to fetch, earn, πολλὸν χρυσίον εὑροῦσα having fetched a large sum, Hdt.; ἀποδίδοται τοῦ εὑρόντος sells for what it will fetch, Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAS-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · singular
second aorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAS-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
14%found
found14% · 25×having found12% · 21×they found8% · 14×he found6% · 10×will find6% · 10×you will find5% · 9×finds4% · 7×finding3% · 6×other renderings42% · 75×

177 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 56 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb96%linking verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 176 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ζητέωI seek, search fἔρχομαιI come, goἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,τόποςa placeδέbut, on the othe
μήNeg
καίand, even, also,οὐNegArticle the
αὐτός
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastσυνέρχομαιI come or go witστόμαthe mouth, speec
ὅς
ἀγρόςa field, the couπᾶςall, the whole, ἕωςuntil, as far as
εὑρίσκωhe shall find176×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καθεύδωI sleep, am sleeκαίand, even, also,ἐν
Article the
σῶμαbody, fleshψυχήthe soul, life, παιδίονa little child,
ἐν
αὐτόςArticle theγαστήρthe womb, stomac
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theὅπουwhere, whitherἄρχωI begin
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theεἷςoneἐκεῖthere, yonder, t

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεὑρίσκω · 176× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Matthew John Revelation Mark 2 Corinthians Hebrews Romans 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 2 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 253 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 79c. AD 40

ἅμα τῇ πρώτῃ γενέσει τὰς εἰς τὸ ζῆν παρασκευὰς ἁπάσας εὗρεν ἄνθρωπος, εἰς διδασκαλίαν τῶν ἔπειτα, μόνον οὐκ ἄντικρυς βοώσης τῆς φύσεως, ὅτι μιμούμενοι τὸν ἀρχηγέτην τοῦ γένους ἀπόνως καὶ ἀταλαιπώρως ἐν ἀφθονωτάτῃ τῶν ἀναγκαίων εὐπορίᾳ διάξουσιν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.10c. AD 75–95

Εὗρον τοίνυν, ὅτι Πτολεμαίων μὲν ὁ δεύτερος μάλιστα δὴ βασιλεὺς περὶ παιδείαν καὶ βιβλίων συναγωγὴν σπουδάσας ἐξαιρέτως ἐφιλοτιμήθη τὸν ἡμέτερον νόμον καὶ τὴν κατʼ αὐτὸν διάταξιν τῆς πολιτείας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φωνὴν μεταβαλεῖν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.8c. AD 100

καὶ ὅταν γένηται οὕτως, ἄγει ὁ βαστάζων τὸν τράγον εἰς τὴν ἔρημον καὶ ἀφαιρεῖ τὸ ἔριον καὶ ἐπιτίθησιν αὐτὸ ἐπὶ φρύγανον τὸ λεγόμενον ῥαχήλ, οὗ καὶ τοὺς βλαστοὺς εἰώθαμεν τρώγειν ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ εὑρίσκοντες: οὕτω μόνης τῆς ῥαχοῦς οἱ καρποὶ γλυκεῖς εἰσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 4 59598247 BC–246 BC

r … Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. περὶ ὧν μοι ἐνετείλω περί τε τοῦ γαυνάκου καὶ οὐχ εὑρήκαμεν, οὐδὲ γνάφαλλα ὡσαύτως. χαλκοῦς οὔ φησι ὁ δεῖνα λαβεῖν εἰς τὸ φόρετρον τοῦ ὀρόβου.

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59354Philadelphia (Arsinoites)245 BC

καθότι ἔγραψας, ἀπεστάλκαμεν κομίζοντα Ζωίλον ἐρίφους δεδαρμένους β, ὄρτυγας λδ, περιστεριδεῖς δὲ οὐκ ἠδυνάσθημεν εὑρεῖν παρευρέσει ἡιτινιοῦν. περὶ τῶν σχαδόνων εἴπαμεν Νέστωι. ἀπέσταλκεν οὖν τῆι κϛ, ὡς αὐτὸς ἔφη.

r Δημοκράτης Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. τὰ σκήνεια τῆς σκηνῆς εὕρηκα βεβρωμένα, ἑωράκην δὲ ἐν τοῖς Δημέου καὶ παρʼ Ἑλένωι ἰτέινα ὀρθὰ καὶ ἐπιτήδεια. καλῶς

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
τῆςho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ὁδοῦhodos way G3598 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
101× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word for road or path is used in Matthew 2:12 and Mark 10:46 to describe a physical route or way. It can also mean a mode or means of doing something.
Amplified meaning
the path of Jesus, the Christian faith
Tyndale gloss
road
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὁδός (i.e., *hodos*) means 'way,' 'path,' or 'road.' It can refer to a physical route or a metaphorical course of conduct, as seen in various New Testament contexts. The term is frequently used to describe journeys and ways of thinking or acting, including the Christian faith. Notably, it appears in verses like Matthew 2:12 and John 14:6.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁδός, -οῦ, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for דֶּרֶךְ;]

a way, path, road: Mt 2:12, Mk 10:46, Lk 3:5, al.; κατὰ τὴν ὁ., Lk 10:4, al.; παρὰ τὴν ὁ., Mt 13:4, al.; c. gen. pers, (subj.), τὴν ὁ. ἑτοιμάζειν (fig.), Mt 3:3, Mk 1:3, al.; c. gen. term. (obj.), ἐθνῶν, Mt 10:5; τ. ἁγίων (fig.), He 9:8; acc., ὁδόν, with force of prep. (like Heb. דֶּרֶךְ; Bl., § 34, 8; 35, 5), ὁ. θαλάσσης, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁδός, -οὔ, ἡ, [appar. fr. τ. EA to go (Lat. adire, accedere), allied w. Lat. solum; Curtius § 281]; Sept. numberless times for )7, less frequently for N18; [fr. Hom. down]; a way; 1. prop. a. ἃ travelled way, road: Mt. ii. 12; vii. 18 sq.; xiii. 4,19; Mk. iv. 4, 15; x. 46; Lk. viii. 5, 12; x. 513 xviii. 35; xix. 86; Acts viii. 26; ix. 17; Jas. ii. 25, ete.; κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν (as ye pass along 060s the way [see xara, II. 1 a.]) by the way, on the way, Lk. x. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; σαββάτου odds, [A. V. a sabbath-day’s journey] the distance that one is allowed to travel on the sabbath, Acts i. 12 (see σάββατον, 1 ἃ.). ἡ ὁδός with a gen. of the object, the way leading to a place (the Hebr. 7 also is construed with a gen., cf. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 676 [Gr. §112, 2; ef. W.§ 30, 27}: ἐθνῶν, Mt. x. 5; τῶν ἁγίων into the holy place, Heb. ix. 8, cf. x. 20, where the grace of God is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὁδός in its ordinary sense of ‘‘ way,” ‘‘road,’’ is seen in such passages as P Petr I. 211} (B.c. 237) ὁδὸς δημοσία, 20. 237 (ili/B.c.) (p. [66]) ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς ὁδοῦ, P Lond τοῦ] (ili/B.c.) (= L. p. 61) τά τε σκεύη μου ἐξέρριψεν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, P Fay 111° (A.D. 95-6) ἀπὸ τοῦ σκυλμοῦ τῆς ὧ(-Ξ δ)δοῦ, ‘‘owing to the fatigue of the journey” (Edd.), and P Oxy VII. 1068%° (iii/A.pD.) καθ᾽ ὁδόν, ‘‘on the road” (cf. Lk 104, a/.). For the metaphorical usage we may cite P Lond 8977 (a.p. 84) (= III. p. 207) in which a man writes that, in view of the treatment received on his last visit, he will not return to the Arsinoite nome, unless his correspondent can find some ‘‘way” of preventing a repetition of the injury—édy δὲ μὴ ἦσα (/. ἦσθα) εὑρηκώς τινα ὁδὸν γράψον μοι κτλ. In the note on P Strass II. 8555 (B.C. 113) it is suggested that the true reading of P Lond 8803 (B.c. 119) (= III. p. 9) is…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁδός (hodos) — road.

ὁδός, ἡ

(οὐδός once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]:

I. of Place, way, road, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁ. ἱερά, to Eleusis, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ποταμοῦ ὁ. course, channel of a river, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with expression of the direction, ὁδὸς ἐς.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν εὐθὺς Ἄργους.. ὁ. leading straight to Argos, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ἀληθείας ὁ. the way to truth, [Refs]

I.2. with Preps., πρὸ ὁδοῦ further on the way, forwards, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later, ={προὔργου}, profitable, useful, πρὸ ὁ. εἶναι πρός τι to be helpful towards.., [Refs 4th c.BC+]by the way, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ τὴν ὁ. along the road, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ τῆς ὁ. on his road, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 'the man in the street', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ὁδῷ on a road, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁδοῦ πάρεργον by the way, cursorily, [Refs 1st…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁδός

hodos

apparently a primary word; a road; by implication, a progress (the

route, act or distance); figuratively, a mode or means:--journey,

(high-)way.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁδός, οῦ, ἡ

n.f.

a way, road, journey

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁδός hodos 101x

a way, road, Mt. 2:12; 7:13, 14; 8:28; 22:9, 10; means of access, approach, entrance, Jn. 14:6; Heb. 9:8; direction, quarter, region, Mt. 4:15; 10:5 the act of journeying, a journey, way, course, Mt. 10:10; Mk. 2:23; 1 Thess. 3:11; a journey, as regards extent, Acts 1:12; met. a way, systematic course of pursuit, Lk. 1:79; Acts 2:28

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wa ('orach, orcha', 'erets, bo', derekh, halikhah, ma`galah, nathibh; hodos, parodos, poreia, tropos; "highway," mecillah, meclul; diexodoi ton hodon): The list just cited contains only a portion of the words translated "way" or "highway" in the King James Version. Most of them have the primary meaning of "road," "customary path," "course of travel" (Ge 3:24; Ex 23:20; Nu 20:17, etc.). By a very easy and natural figure "way" is applied to the course of human conduct, the manner of life which one lives (Ex 18:20; 32:8; Nu 22:32; 1Sa 8:3;

Of sin, broad Mt 7:13

Jesus is the Joh 14:6; Heb 9:8

Doctrines taught by Christ Ac 9:2; 19:23; 22:4; 24:14,22

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
54%way
way54% · 55×road24% · 24×ways9% · 9×journey6% · 6×highways3% · 3×other renderings3% · 3×other renderings2% · 2×

102 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial52%object34%subject10%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 101 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνπαράκατά
εἰς
λέγωI say, speakπήραa sack, walletαἴρωI raise, lift up
ἐγώ
γνωρίζωI make known, deἐγκαινίζωI consecrate, de
ἄλλοςother, another, diff
διά
ΝεφθαλίμProp
γῆthe earth, soil,
ὁδόςway101×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἀπάγωI lead, carry, tκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔρχομαιI come, goὅσοςτὶς
αὐτός
χαίρωI rejoice, am glσῴζωI save, heal
σύ
ἔμπροσθενδείκνυμιI point out, shoArticle the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
εὐθύςstraight, immediκαθώςjust as, as

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁδός · 101× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke Mark 2 Peter John Hebrews James Romans 1 Corinthians Revelation 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 69c. AD 40

καὶ τέχναις καὶ ἐπιστήμαις πολυσχιδεῖς ἀνατέμνων ὁδοὺς λεωφόρους ἁπάσας διὰ γῆς ἔρχεται καὶ θαλάττης τὰ ἐν ἑκατέρᾳ φύσει διερευνώμενος·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.249c. AD 75–95

τούτων ἀκροασάμενος ἔχαιρέ τε τοῖς γεγονόσι καὶ τοῖς εἰρημένοις τὸν θεὸν οὕτως ὁρῶν αὐτῷ τῆς ὁδοῦ σαφῶς συλλαμβάνοντα, καὶ προκομίσας ὁρμίσκον τε καί τινας κόσμους, οὓς εὐπρεπὲς φορεῖν παρθένοις, ἀνεδίδου τῇ κόρῃ τῆς ἐπὶ τῷ πιεῖν χάριτος ἀμοιβὴν…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

Πατήφιος τοῦ Πεμσάϊος βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος ἧς κρατοῦσιν οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος,

P.Diog. 26Philadelphia (?) (Arsinoites)AD 159

καὶ ἃς ἔχεις ἐν ἑτέρᾳ σφραγῖδι ἱερᾶς γῆς ἀρούρας δύο οὔσας πρὸς τῇ δημοσίᾳ ὁδῷ ὧν τὰ δημόσια πάντα σιτικά τε καὶ ἀργυρικὰ ἀποδώσω ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου, μενόντων καθαρῶν

P.Bas. 1 2Arsinoites ?AD 190

τὰς τροφὰς τῶν καμήλων δραχμὰς υ. ἐὰν δὲ πταίσῃ τι ἐξ αὐτῶν κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν, οἴσομεν ὑμῖν τὴν σφραγῖδα καὶ οὐδὲν ζητηθήσεται πρὸς ἡμᾶς. ἔτους λα Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου Κομμόδου

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ὄνταςeimi being G1510 Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-APM — Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%is
is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς
οὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
εἰμίbeing2457×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegγάρfor
ἐν
Article theσύαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐγώ
εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ἄνδραςanēr men G435 Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
216× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A man in the Bible refers to an adult male, often in contrast to a woman or child. It can also describe a husband, as seen in Matthew 1:16 and Romans 7:2. The term is used to address or describe individuals, such as a prophet or brother.
Amplified meaning
adult males
Tyndale gloss
man
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀνήρ (anēr) means 'man' in various contexts, distinguishing adult males from women and children. It can refer to a husband or a male person in general, and is often used in conjunction with other nouns or adjectives. The New Testament employs it similarly, as seen in verses like Matthew 1:16 and 1 Corinthians 13:11. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ, freq. אֱנוֹשׁ, also אָדָם, etc.;]

a man, Lat. vir.

As opp. to a woman, Ac 8:12, I Ti 2:12; as a husband, Mt 1:16, Jo 4:16, Ro 7:2, Tit 1:6.

As opp. to a boy or infant, I Co 13:11, Eph 4:13, Ja 3:2.

In appos. with a noun or adj., as ἀ. ἁμαρτωλός, Lk 5:8; ἀ. προφήτης, 24:19; freq. in terms of address, as ἀ. ἀδελφοί, Ac 1:16; and esp. with…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ, a man, Lat. vir. The meanings of this word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage ; for it is employed 1. with a reference to sex, and so to distinguish a man from a woman; either a. asa male: Acts viii. 12; xvii.12; 1 Tim.ii.12; or b. asa husband: Mt.i.16; Mk. x.2; Jn. iv. 16 sqq.; Ro..vii. 2 sqq:; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq.; Gal. iv. 27; 1 Tim. iii. 2,12; Tit. i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband: Mt.i.19; Rev. xxi. 2, ete. 2. with a reference to age, and to distinguish an adult man from a boy: Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38 (where ἄνδρες, γυναῖκες and παιδία are discriminated) ; with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue: 1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to νήπιος) ; Eph. iv. 13; Jas. iii. 2, (in the last two pass. τέλειος ἀνήρ). 3. univ. any male person, a man; so where tis might have been used: Lk. viii. 41; ix.38; Acts νἱ. 11; x.5,ete. where ἀνήρ and τὶς are united…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀνήρ. The special differentia of ἀνήρ : ἄνθρωπος survives in MGr (ἄντρας, ἄθρωπος), where even the old gen. sing. (ἀντρός) may still be found beside the ‘‘regular” τοῦ ἄντρα (Thumb Handbook, p. 48). Naturally there is nothing particular to record in the uses of this everyday word, which has in NT and Hellenistic generally much the same range as in class. Gk. Thus, taking the index to BGU IV., we can illustrate many of the uses noted for the NT in Grimm from documents of the Augustan period. So (1) husband by the perpetual phrase μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἀνδρός after the name of a woman, as 1126* (where ἀνδρός is written over an erased ὁμομητρίου ἀδελφοῦ), or in a marriage contract as τορϑ τηρεῖν τὰ πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρᾳ καὶ τὸν κοινὸν βίον δίκαια, while the document will also use ἀνήρ for irregular relations in the pledge μηδ᾽ ἄλλωι ἀνδρὶ συνεῖναι. Then under Grimm’s (3) we have 1189" of σημαινόμενοι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνήρ (anēr) — man.

ἀνήρ, ὁ, ἀνδρός, ἀνδρί, ἄνδρα,

vocative ἄνερ: plural ἄνδρες, -δρῶν, -δράσι [ᾰ], -dras: Aeolic dialect dative plural ἄνδρεσι[Refs 7th c.BC+] for οἱ ἄνδρε; the Ionic dialect crasis is ὡνήρ, ὧνδρες, [Refs 5th c.BC+] [Epic dialect Poets mostly use ᾱ in arsi, ᾰ in thesi; but in trisyllable forms with stem ἀνέρ- always ; so also Trag. in Lyric poetry, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in nominative by analogy; cf. Sanskrit nar- from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] ner-, nṛ- from nṛ-, Gk. ἀνδρ- from ṇr-):—man, opposed to woman (ἄνθρωπος being man as opposed to to beast), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἄπαις without male children, [Refs 8th c.BC+] mostly of princes, leaders, etc., but also of free men; ἀ δήμου one of the people, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with a qualifying word to indicate rank, ἀ. βουληφόρος[Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνήρ

aner

a primary word (compare 444); a man (properly as an individual

male):--fellow, husband, man, sir.

see GREEK for 444

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ

n.m.

a male human being, a man

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνήρ anēr 216x

a male person of full age and stature, as opposed to a child or female, 1 Cor. 13:11; a husband, Mt. 1:16; a man, human being, individual, Lk. 11:31; used also pleonastically with other nouns and adjectives, Lk. 5:8; Acts 1:16

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀνήρ Root ΑΝΕΡ a man, Lat. vir (not homo):

a man, opp. to a woman, Hom., etc.

a man, opp. to a god, πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε id. Hom.

a man, opp. to a youth, a man in the prime of life, id. Hom., etc.; εἰς ἄνδρας ἐγγράφεσθαι to be enrolled among the men, Dem.

a man emphatically, a man indeed, ἀνέρες ἔστε, φίλοι Il.; πολλοὶ μὲν ἄνθρωποι, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἄνδρες many human beings, but few men, Hdt.

a man, opp. to his wife, a husband, Hom., etc.; αἰγῶν ἄνερ, Virgil's vir gregis, Theocr.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APM — Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%men
men40% · 86×man34% · 74×husband18% · 39×husbands6% · 13×other renderings2% · 5×

217 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject38%object18%adverbial13%predicate12%indirect object6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 216 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, mαὐτός
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,πνεῦμαwind, breath, spΠαῦλοςPaul
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,εἰρήνηpeace, peace of αὐτός
αὐτός
πρόςἐκοἶδαI know, remember
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐσθίωI eatὁδόςa way, road, jouἀθέμιτοςillegal, unlawfu
ἀνήρmen216×
what comes after →
Article the
τόποςa placeξηρόςdry, withered, dσυνίστημιI commend, prove
ἀδελφόςa brother
καίand, even, also,ἐγώδεῖit is necessary,
ὅς
ὄνομαname, character,ἵστημιI cause to standἔμπροσθεν
αὐτός
δίκαιοςjust, righteous,γαμέωI marryἐάνCond
οὗτος
ἀληθήςunconcealed, truὅσοςοὔτεNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀνήρ · 216× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Luke Romans John Matthew Ephesians James 1 Timothy Mark 1 Peter Colossians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 502 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.8c. AD 75–95

ἦσαν δέ τινες, οἳ πόθῳ τῆς ἱστορίας ἐπʼ αὐτήν με προύτρεπον, καὶ μάλιστα δὴ πάντων Ἐπαφρόδιτος ἀνὴρ ἅπασαν μὲν ἰδέαν παιδείας ἠγαπηκώς, διαφερόντως δὲ χαίρων ἐμπειρίαις πραγμάτων, ἅτε δὴ μεγάλοις μὲν αὐτὸς ὁμιλήσας πράγμασι καὶ τύχαις πολυτρόποις,…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 8.1c. AD 100

Τίνα δὲ δοκεῖτε τύπον εἶναι, ὅτι ἐντέταλται τῷ Ἰσραὴλ προσφέρειν δάμαλιν τοὺς ἄνδρας, ἐν οἷς εἰσὶν ἁμαρτίαι τέλειαι, καὶ σφάξαντας κατακαίειν, καὶ αἴρειν τότε τὴν σποδὸν παιδία καὶ βάλλειν εἰς ἄγγη καὶ περιτιθέναι τὸ ἔριον τὸ κόκκινον ἐπὶ ξύλον ʽἴδε…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

διέθετο ὑγιαίνων νοῶν φρονῶν Δρύτων Παμφίλου Κρὴς τῶν διαδόχων καὶ τοῦ ἐπιτάγματος ἱππάρχης ἐπʼ ἀνδρῶν· εἴη μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι· ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

διέθετο ὑγιαίνων νοῶν φρονῶν Δρύτων Παμφίλου Κρὴς τῶν διαδόχων καὶ τοῦ ἐπιτάγματος ἱππάρχης ἐπʼ ἀνδρῶν. εἴη μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι. ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

Ἡλιοδώρου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Πανερεῦς Γούνσιος Πέρσης καὶ Σενενοῦπις Φίβιος Περσίνη μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῆς ἀνδρὸς Πανερεῦτος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου, Πανεβχούνει καὶ Ὥρωι καὶ Φίβει καὶ Πασήμει τοῖς τέσσαρσι τῶν ἐκ

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
τεte both G5037 Particle
209× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A conjunction meaning and or both, used to connect words or ideas closely. Found in Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33, it shows a strong link between things.
Tyndale gloss
and/both
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τέ (te) is an enclitic copulative particle that functions similarly to the Latin '-que' and is used to denote a closer connection than the more general καί (kai). It appears primarily in the New Testament, especially in the book of Acts, and can mean 'and,' 'both,' or 'also.' Notably, it is used in verses like Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = et, ac, atque), not very freq. in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac.

τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (Bl., §77, 8): Mt 28:12, Jo 4:42, Ac 2:33, 37, 40 10:22 11:21, al.

Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Ac 26:16 Ro 14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Lk 12:45, Ac 1:1 15:9 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τέ, (as δέ comes fr. δή, μέν fr. μήν, so τέ fr. the adv. TH, prop. as; [al. ally it with καί, ef. Curtius $§ 27, 647; Vaniéek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat. § 195]), a copulative enclitie particle (on the use of which ef. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times; nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from the particle καί in that the latter is conjunctive, τέ adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Baéumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 145), καί introduces something new under the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas τέ marks it as…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τε (te) — and/both.

τε,

enclitic Particle, with two main uses (see. infr. A, B).

__A as a Conjunction,

__A.I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usually short in [Refs 8th c.BC+], longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ᾽ ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ᾽ ἀδικήσαντες κατ᾽ ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen.[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+], compare 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (which see); τε may be used three or more times…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τέ

te

a primary particle (enclitic) of connection or addition; both or also

(properly, as correlation of 2532):--also, and, both, even, then,

whether. Often used in composition, usually as the latter participle.

see GREEK for 2532

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τέ

Disj.prt.

and, both

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τε te 215x

enclitic, can function as a conj., serving either as a lightly-appending link, Acts 1:15; and, Acts 2:3; or as an inclusive prefix, Lk. 12:45; both, Lk. 24:20; Acts 26:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
37%then
then37% · 84×both35% · 79×and14% · 32×also11% · 26×other renderings3% · 6×

227 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject20%adverbial19%object13%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀνευρίσκωI find by seekinδιαγογγύζωI murmur greatlyφίλος
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πιστεύωI believe, have κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπᾶςall, the whole,
λέγωI say, speak
καρδίαthe heart, innerφυλακήa watching, guarθεόςGod, a god
πολύςmuch, many, often
σφόδραexceedingly, greἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemαὐτός
ἐν
ἐγώμάρτυςa witnessποιέωI do, make
τέboth209×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Ἕλληνa Hellene, a Greγυνήa woman, wife, mArticle the
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaulχώραregion, land, fiπόλιςa city
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakπεριαστράπτωI flash around l
πρός
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
γάρfor
θῆλυςfemaleἐπιθυμίαdesire, eagernesζάωI live

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτέ · 209× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews Romans Luke 1 Corinthians John Matthew 2 Corinthians James Ephesians Jude Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
γυναῖκας,gunē women, G1135 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
214× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A woman, either married or unmarried, and sometimes specifically a wife, as in Matthew 11:11 and Romans 7:2. This term is also used as a term of respect and endearment.
Amplified meaning
females
Tyndale gloss
woman
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word γυνή (i.e., *gunē*) means 'woman' and can refer to any female, including wives and unmarried women. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, such as addressing women with respect or affection. The term also specifically denotes a wife and appears in passages like Matthew 1:20 and 14:3. Lexicons note that it can imply different nuances depending on the context.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γυνή, -αικός, ἡ,

[in LXX for אִשָּׁה ;]

a woman, married or unmarried: Mt 11:11 14:21, al.; ὕπανδρος γ., Ro 7:2; γ. χήρα, Lk 4:26; in vocat., γύναι implies neither reproof nor severity, but is used freq. as a term of respect and endearment, Mt 15:28, Jo 2:4, 4:21 19:26.

a wife: Mt 1:20, I Co 7:3, 4 al.; γ. ἀπολύειν, Mk 10:2, al.; γ. ἔχειν Mk 6:18; γ. λαβεῖν, Mk 12:19; γ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γυνή, -αικός, ἡ; 1. univ. a woman of any age, whether a virgin, or married, or a widow: Mt. ix. 20; xiii. 33; xxvii. 55; Lk. xiii. 11; Acts v. 14, ete.; ἡ μεμνηστευμένη τινὶ γυνή, Lk. ii. 5 RG; ἡ ὕπανδρος γυνή, Ro. vii. 2 ; γυνὴ xnpa, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14); xvii. 9; femina vidua, | Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife: 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq.; | Eph. ν. 22, ete.; γυνή τινος, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; xix. 3,5; Acts v. 1, 7; 1 Co. vii. 2; Eph. v. 28; Rev. ii. 20 [G L WH mrg.], ete. of a betrothed woman: Mt. i. 20, 24. ἡ γυνὴ τοῦ πατρός his step-mother: 1 Co. v. 1 (38 NW, Lev. xviii. 8). ἔχειν γυναῖκα : Mt. xiv.4; xxii. 28; Mk. vi. 18; xii. 23; Lk. xx. 33; see ἔχω, I. 2b. fin. γύναι, as a form of address, may be used — either in indignation, Lk. xxii. 57; or in admiration, Mt. xv. 28; or in kindness and favor, Lk. xiii. 12; Jn. iv. 21; or in respect, Jn. ii. 4; xix. 26, (as in Hom. Il. 3, 204; Od.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γυνή. This old noun retains from Homer down to MGr—where it has only changed its declension (ἡ yvvaika)—the two meanings of ‘‘woman”’ and ‘‘ wife”: it is superfluous to illustrate the one or the other, as we should get no light on the only questions that arise in NT, such as which word to use in rendering Mt 578. The meeting of two words characteristic of that passage does, however, make it worth while to quote Wiinsch 4 58° (iii/A.D.), where Domitiana prays that her lover may be wholly devoted to her, μηδεμίαν ἄλλην γυναῖκα μήτε παρθένον ἐπιθυμοῦντα. That γυναῖκα = ‘* married woman” in Mt /.c. is anyhow probable. The phrase of Mk 1215 ἢ etc., may be paralleled in the oldest word is | | the Κοινή. yovla extant Greek papyrus, P Eleph 1° (B.c. 311) (= Selections, p. 2) λαμβάνει Ἡρακλείδης Δημητρίαν Koray γυναῖκα γνησίαν παρὰ τοῦ πατρός κτλ. The irregularity of the word’s flexion naturally…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γυνή (gunē) — woman.

γῠνή,

Doric dialect γυνά, Boeotian dialect βανά (see entry), ἡ, genitive γυναικός, accusative γυναῖκα, vocative γύναι (γυνή [Refs 6th c.BC+]: Aeolic dialect dative plural γυναίκεσσι [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—woman, opposed to man,[Refs 8th c.BC+] substantive, γ. ταμίη[Refs 8th c.BC+]; γρηΰς (which see), ἀλετρίς (which see), δμῳαὶ γυναῖκες [Refs 8th c.BC+]: vocative, as a term of respect or affection, mistress, lady, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φαντὶ γυναῖκες the lasses say, [Refs]; πρὸς γυναικός like a woman, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὅρκους γυναικὸς εἰς ὕδωρ γράφω [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. wife, spouse, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; opposed to ἑταίρα, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; γ. γνησία, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also, concubine, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

γυνή

gune

probably from the base of 1096; a woman; specially, a wife:--wife,

woman.

see GREEK for 1096

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γυνή, αικός, ἡ

n.f.

a woman, wife, my lady

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γυνή gynē 215x

a woman, Mt. 5:28, et al.; a married woman, wife, Mt. 5:31, 32; 14:3, et al.; in the voc. ὦ γύναι, O woman! an ordinary mode of addressing females under every circumstance; met. used of the Church, as united to Christ, Rev. 19:7; 21:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γυνή Prob. from same Root as γίγνομαι. a woman, Lat. femina, opp. to man, Hom., etc.; with a second Subst., γυνὴ ταμίη housekeeper, δέσποινα γ., δμωαὶ γυναῖκες, etc., id. Hom.:—in voc. often as a term of respect, mistress, lady, Theocr.:— πρὸς γυναικός like a woman, Aesch.

a wife, spouse, opp. to παρθένος, Hom., Xen.

a mortal woman, opp to a goddess, Hom.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Smith's Bible Dictionary

The position of women in the Hebrew commonwealth contrasts favorably with that which in the present day is assigned to them generally in eastern countries. The most salient point of contrast in the usages of ancient as compared with modern Oriental society was the large amount of liberty enjoyed by women. Instead of being immured in a harem, or appearing in public with the face covered. The wives and maidens of ancient times mingled freely and openly with the other sex in the duties and amenities of ordinary life. Rebekah travelled on a camel with her face unveiled until she came into the presence of her affianced. (Genesis 24:64,65) Jacob saluted Rachel with a kiss in the presence of the shepherds. (Genesis 29:11) Women played no inconsiderable part in public celebrations (

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Creation of Ge 1:27; 2:21,22

→ Named Ge 2:23

→ Fall of, and curse upon Ge 3:1-16; 2Co 11:3; 1Ti 2:14

→ Promise to Ge 3:15

→ Had separate apartments in dwellings Ge 24:67; 31:33; Es 2:9,11

→ Veiled the face Ge 24:65

→ See VAIL

→ Vows of Nu 30:3-16

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(A) MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS relating to (Select Reading Prov. 31)

Pr 31:1-31

(1) Creation and Temptation of

Ge 1:27; 2:22; 3:1,6,13; 2Co 11:3; 1Ti 2:14

(2) Rights of

Nu 27:1-8

(3) The Subjection of

Ge 3:16; 1Co 11:3; 14:34; Eph 5:22; 1Ti 2:11; 1Pe 3:1,5

(4) As Wives

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
41%woman
woman41% · 90×wife32% · 71×women15% · 33×wives5% · 11×other renderings2% · 5×other renderings5% · 11×

221 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject43%object23%adverbial16%predicate6%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 214 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςἀπολύωI release, let g
καίand, even, also, nam
τέDisjδέbut, on the otheἈβιάProp
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theκεφαλήthe headπᾶςall, the whole,
αὐτός
ἔχωI have, hold, poπροσέρχομαιI come near, conλέγωI say, speak
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,
γυνήwomen,214×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀνήρa male human beiἀδελφόςa brotherγάρfor
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπαιδίονa little child, μήNeg
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,μήNegδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐν
μοιχείαadulteryμέσοςmiddle, in the mκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
μήNeg
ζητέωI seek, search fφοβέωI fear, am terriἅπτωI touch or handl

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγυνή · 214× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Luke Matthew John Acts Revelation Mark 1 Timothy Ephesians 1 Peter Colossians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 424 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 124c. AD 40

πάλιν δ’ αὖ γυναιξὶν ἡ φορὰ τῶν καταμηνίων εἰς ἑπτὰ τὰς πλείστας ἡμέρας χορηγεῖται.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ Σάρρας τῆς Ἁβράμου γυναικός, καὶ πῶς τὸν βίον κατέστρεψεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 13.2c. AD 100

ἀκούσατε οὖν περὶ τοῦ λαοῦ τί λέγει ἡ γραφή: Ἐδεῖτο δὲ Ἰσαὰκ περὶ Ῥεβέκκας τῆς γυναικὸς αὐτοῦ, ὅτι στεῖρα ἦν: καὶ συνέλαβεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 25Pathyris104 BC

ὠνὴν Αἰγυπτίαν ἥν ἔθετο διʼ Ἐσπνούθιος Αἰγυπτίου μονογράφου Κροκοδίλων πόλεως Τνεφερῶτι τῇ τοῦ Νεχθανούπιος γυναικὶ ἀντὶ τῆς παρακεχωρημένης ἐν τῆι ἄνω σφραγῖδι ἀρούρας μιᾶς ἡμίσους τετάρτου ὑφʼ ὑμῶν· καὶ

P.Grenf. 2 26Pathyris104 BC

εἰς τὸν Ταρεήσιος λόγον τῆς αὐτοῦ μητρὸς τοῖς δανεισταῖς Χαιρήμωνι καὶ Ἐσθλαδᾷ καὶ Πνήφει γυναικὶ καὶ ἀδελφῇ· καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι Ὧρον μηδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν

P.Grenf. 2 30Pathyris103 BC

τὰ προγεγραμμένα. τοῦτο δʼ ἐστὶν τὸ ὀφείλημα ὃ ὤφειλεν Ἁρπὼς Παβῦτος καὶ ἡ τούτου γυνὴ Ταρεῆσις. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
δεδεμένουςdeō bound G1210 Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
43× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To bind means to tie or fasten something, like an animal in Matthew 21:2 or a dead body in John 19:40. It can also mean to restrain someone with chains, as in Revelation 9:14.
Amplified meaning
lead, take, bound, captive
Tyndale gloss
to bind
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέω (deō) means to bind or tie, with applications that range from literal binding (like tying an animal) to metaphorical uses (such as binding by obligation or law). In the New Testament, it appears in contexts involving physical restraint, like binding captives (e.g., Matthew 27:2), as well as spiritual or legal bindings, such as marriage (Romans 7:2). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέω (I),

[in LXX chiefly for אסר ;]

to tie, bind, fasten;

c. acc. rei, seq. εἰς δεσμάς, Mt 13:30; of an ass, Mt 21:2, Mk 11:2, 4 Lk 19:30.

c. acc. pers., of swathing a dead body, ὀθονίοις, Jo 19:40; δεδομένος τ. πόδας . . . κειρίαις (Bl., §34, 6; Kühner 3, iii, 125), Jo 11:44; of binding with chains, ἀγγέλους, Re 9:14; a demoniac, πέδαις κ. ἁλύσεσι, Mk 5:3, 4; captives, Mt 12:29 14:3 22:13 27:2, Mk 3:27 6:17 15:1, 7, Jo 18:12, 24,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέω : [fut. δήσω] ; 1 aor. ἔδησα ; pf. ptep. δεδεκώς (Acts xxii. 29) ; Pass., pf. δέδεμαι ; 1 aor. inf. δεθῆναι (Acts xxi. 33); Sept. chiefly for 0%; [fr. Hom. down] ; to bind, tie, fasten; 1. prop.: τί, εἰς δεσμάς, Mt. xiii. 30 [Tr WH br. G prob. om. εἰς, ef. B. 150 (131) ; W. 225 (211) ]; ὀθόνη τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς δεδεμ. a sheet bound by the four corners (to the sky), Acts x. 11 (GL T Tr WH om. δεδεμ. kai); an animal, to prevent it from straying about, ὄνος δεδεμένη, πῶλος δεδεμένος, Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix. 30; with πρὸς τ. θύραν added, Mk. xi. 4; with ace. of pers. to bind, to fasten with chains, to throw into chains : ᾿ ἀγγέλους, Rev. ix. 14; a madman, πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι, Mk. y. 3 sq.; captives, Mt. [xii. 29]; xiv. 3; xxii. 13; xxvii. 2; Mk. [iii. 27]; vi.17; xv.1; Jn. xviii.12; Acts ix. 14; xxi. 11; xxii. 29; Rev. xx. 2; Pass., Mk. xv.7; Jn. xviii. 24; Acts ix. 2, 21 (in the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δέω. With Lk 13!® where demoniac power ‘binds’ the sufferer from curvature of the spine, cf. the use of the verb to describe the “binding” power of curses: Sy/2 8091 (iv/iii B.c.) ἔδησα τὰς [xe]ipas Kal τοὺς πόδας καὶ [τὴ]ν γλῶσσαν καὶ τὴν ψυχ[ή]ν κτλ. Dittenberger remarks that καταδέω (2.3) is commoner in this cursing formula: he cites another aefx7o in almost the same phrases. Other examples of the verb are P Fay 108! (c. A.D. 171) ἔδησαν ἡμᾶς σὺν καὶ τῷ μαγδωλοφύλακι, ‘bound us along with the guard of the watch-tower,” said of thieves, P Oxy X. 12947 (ii/iiiA.D.) ἱμάντα δεδεμένον els τὸ πανάριον καλόν, ‘Sa good strap tied to the basket” (Edd.). By. P Oxy IV. 705%! (A.D. 200-2) τ[ὸ] ὅμοιον δὴ καὶ ἐ[π]ὶ τούτου φυλαχθήσεται, “the same rule shall be observed in this case also” (Edd.), 74. VI. 8994 (A.D. 200) od δή χάριν, “for which reason,’’ 74. 907!® (A.D. 276) λέγω δὴ τῇ Διδύμῃ, ‘to…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέω (deō) — to bind.

δέω,

__B [Refs 4th c.BC+]: future δεήσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐδέησα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect δεδέηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, future δεήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect δεοῦμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later -ηθήσομαι [LXX+1st c.AD+]: aorist ἐδεήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δεδέημαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—lack, miss, stand in need of, with genitive, ἐμεῖο δὲ δῆσε.. ἀλκτῆρα γενέσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; παραδείγματος τὸ παράδειγμα αὐτὸ δεδέηκεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__B.2 frequently in Attic dialect, πολλοῦ δέω I want much, i.e. am far from, mostly with infinitive present, πολλοῦ δ. ἀπολογεῖσθαι I am far from defending myself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρὰ μικρὸν ἐδέησα ἀποθανεῖν variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+] I am far from it, [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέω

deo

a primary verb; to bind (in various applications, literally or

figuratively):--bind, be in bonds, knit, tie, wind. See also 1163,

1189.

see GREEK for 1163

see GREEK for 1189

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέω

v.

I bind

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέω deō 43x

to bind, tie, Mt. 13:30; 21:2; to bind, confine, Mt. 27:2; 14:3; to impede, hinder, 2 Tim. 2:9; to bind with infirmity, Lk. 13:16; to bind by a legal or moral tie, as marriage, Rom. 7:2; 1 Cor. 7:27, 39; by impl. to impel, compel, Acts 20:22; in NT to pronounce or declare to be binding or obligatory, or, to declare to be prohibited and unlawful, Mt. 16:19; 18:18

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RPP-APM — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

See BIND.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
36%bound
bound36% · 16×having bound11% · 5×tied9% · 4×bind5% · 2×be bound5% · 2×has been bound5% · 2×he shall bind5% · 2×you shall bind5% · 2×other renderings20% · 9×

44 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb88%second object7%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 43 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἸησοῦςJesusζιζάνιονspurious wheat, ἸωάννηςJohn
εἰμίI am, exist
γῆthe earth, soil,ἐκεῖσεthither, thereαὐτός
πῶλοςa colt, young ass
εὑρίσκωI find
ἐάνCond
ὅςὅσος
γυνήa woman, wife, my la
καίand, even, also,
δέωbound43×
what comes after →
αὐτός
εἰςπούςthe footἀπάγωI lead, carry, t
ἐπί
Article theὅςὅσος
Article the
ἰσχυρόςstrong, mighty, ἸησοῦςJesusΣατανᾶςan adversary, Sa
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐνπῶλοςa colt, young asτότεthen
ἐν
Article theοὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἹεροσόλυμαProp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέω · 43× in the New Testament
Acts Matthew Mark John 1 Corinthians Luke Revelation 2 Timothy Colossians Romans
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 43 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn Sobriety 39c. AD 40

οὐκοῦν οὗτοι μὲν ὥσπερ δεδεμένα καὶ καθειργμένα ἐκτήσαντο ἀγαθά, ἕτεροι δ’ εἰσὶν οἳ λελυμένοις καὶ ἀφέτοις καὶ ἐλευθέροις ἐχρήσαντο πᾶσι τὰς εἰς ἐπίδειξιν ὕλας ἀφθονωτάτας προσλαβόντες·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.63c. AD 75–95

οἰνοχόος τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ σφόδρα αὐτῷ τιμώμενος κατʼ ὀργὴν δεδεμένος καὶ συνδιαφέρων τῷ Ἰωσήπῳ τὰς πέδας συνηθέστερος αὐτῷ μᾶλλον ἐγένετο καί, συνέσει γὰρ ἐδόκει αὐτὸν προύχειν, ὄναρ ἰδὼν ἐξέθετο παρακαλῶν δηλοῦν εἴ τι σημαίνει, μεμφόμενος ὅτι τοῖς…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 40.5c. AD 96

τῷ γὰρ ἀρχιερεῖ ἴδιαι λειτουργίαι δεδομέναι εἰσίν, καὶ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν ἴδιος ὁ τόπος προστέτακται, καὶ Λευΐταις ἴδιαι διακονίαι ἐπίκεινται: ὁ λαϊκὸς ἄνθρωπος τοῖς λαῖκοῖς προστάγμασιν δέδεται.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Lond. 2 p. 222-225 no. 192 RoBakchias (Arsinoites) (?)AD 14–AD 37

1 … δεω … … ος ἄρουραι δ 𐅵 δ … εως δ … φ … ἄρουραι

O.Did. 431DidymoiAD 100–AD 110

μεν πυρροβαδίου· ἑτέρου δὲ σκύλακος … υτω ἐτετραφήκειν· λοιπὸν παρακληθεὶς … … ητις αὐτὸν ἔδησεν τῶν ἐκεῖ. ἐὰν δὲ … θη γ’ ἐρχομένου … … ψον

βοηθὸς τοῦ πράγματος ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀγαθὸς κυβερνήτης, υἱὸν πατρὶ χαριζόμενος. ἐὰν δέ πως … δησης χρ … … … ὥρας οὔσης τοῦ καταπλεῦσαι δήλωσόν μοι καὶ τάχιόν σοι ἐλεύσομαι.

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
ἀγάγῃagō he may bring [them] G71 Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · singular
69× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This verb means to lead or bring something. Jesus used it in John 10:16 to describe leading his followers. It also appears in Romans 2:4 and Hebrews 2:10.
Tyndale gloss
to bring
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄγω (lemma: agō) primarily means to lead or bring. It can refer to guiding someone or something, carrying, or spending time. In the New Testament, it is used in various contexts, including leading people to court or guiding them spiritually. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἄγω,

[in LXX for בּוא hi., לקח, נהג, etc.;]

to lead, bring, carry: c. acc., seq. ἐπί, εἰς, ἕως, πρός and simple dat.; metaph., to lead, guide, impel: Jo 10:16 Ro 2:4, He 2:10, II Ti 3:6, al.

to spend or keep a day: Lk 24:21, Ac 19:38

Intrans., to go: subjunc., ἄγωμεν, Mt 2:46, al. (Cramer, 61; MM, VGT, s.v.).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄγω ; impf. ἦγον; fut. ἄξω ; 2 aor. ἤγαγον, inf. ἀγαγεῖν, (more rarely 1 aor. ἦξα, in ἐπάγω 2 Pet. ii. 5); Pass., pres. ἄγομαι; impf. ἠγόμην; 1 aor. ἤχθην ; 1 fut. ἀχθήcopa; [fr. Hom. down]; to drive, lead. 1. properly [A. V. ordinarily, to bring]; a. to lead by laying hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of destination: of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7; Lk. xix. 35; Mk. xi. 7 (T Tr WH φέρουσιν) ; [Lk. xix. 30]; τινά foll. by εἰς with ace. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2 ¢.]; x. 34; (ἤγαγον k. εἰσήγαγον eis, Lk. xxii. 54); Jn. xviii. 23; Acts vi. 12; ix. 2; xvii. 5 [RG]; xxi. 34; xxii. 5, 24 Rec. ; xxiii. 10, 31; ἐπί with ace., Acts xvii. 19; ἕως, Lk. iv. 29; πρός twa, to persons, Lk. [iv. 40]; xviii. 40; Acts ix. 27; Jn.viii.3[Ree.]. Ὄ. to lead by accompanying to (into) any place: εἰς, Acts xi. 26 (25); ἕως. Acts xvii. 15; πρός τινα, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43); ix. 13; Acts…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄγω (agō) — to bring.

ἄγω [ᾰ],

imperfect ἦγον, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἄγεσκον[Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ἄξω[Refs 8th c.BC+]: thematic aorist imperative ἄξετε[Refs 8th c.BC+]infinitive ἀξέμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 2 ἤγαγον[Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 1 ἦξα rare, ἦζε[Refs 5th c.BC+], participle ἄξας[Refs], infinitive ἄξαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἦχα[Refs 7th c.BC+], (προ-) [Refs 4th c.BC+], (συν-) [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc., Doric dialect συν-αγάγοχα[LXX+1st c.AD+] (also in compounds, (εἰσ-) Ps.-Philipp. cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+], (κατ-) Canon Laws texts[Refs]; ἀγείοχα[Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἀγέωχα (δι-) [Refs 2nd c.BC+], etc.: pluperfect ἀγηόχει[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—middle, future ἄξομαι[Refs 8th c.BC+], Trag.: them. aorist 1 ἄξοντο[Refs 8th c.BC+] (ἐσ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+], (προεσ-) [Refs]aorist 2 ἠγαγόμην[Refs 8th c.BC+], 2nd pers.singular ἀγάγαο[Refs]:—passive, future…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄγω

ago

a primary verb; properly, to lead; by implication, to bring, drive,

(reflexively) go, (specially) pass (time), or (figuratively)

induce:--be, bring (forth), carry, (let) go, keep, lead away, be open.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄγω

v.

I lead

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἄγω agō 67x

to lead. bring; lead away, drive off, as a booty of cattle; conduct, accompany; lead out, produce; conduct with force, drag, hurry away; guide, incite, entice; convey one’s self, go, go away; pass or spend as time; celebrate

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄγω on the augment in the Doric form ἆγον, see Chantraine, MHG, 311. to lead or carry, to convey, bring, with living creatures as the object, φέρω being used of things, δῶκε δ᾽ ἄγειν ἑτάροισι γυναῖκα, καὶ τρίποδα φέρειν Il. (v. infr. 3); ἄγ. εἰς or πρὸς τόπον; poet. also c. acc. loci, ἄγει Ἀχέροντος ἀκτάν Soph.

intr. of soldiers, to march, Xen., etc.; so, ἄγωμεν let us go, NTest.

part. ἄγων is used in sense, taking, στῆσε δ᾽ ἄγων, where we should use two Verbs, took and placed, Hom.

to take with one, ἑταίρους id. Hom.

to carry off as captives or booty, id. Hom., etc.; mostly in phrase ἄγειν καὶ φέρειν to sweep a country of all its plunder (where φέρειν refers to things, ἄγειν to men and cattle); then c. acc. loci, φέρων καὶ ἄγων τὴν Βιθυνίδα plundering all…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAS-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · singular
second aorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAS-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
10%let us go
let us go10% · 7×bring6% · 4×they brought6% · 4×he brought6% · 4×brought6% · 4×led6% · 4×be brought6% · 4×do bring6% · 4×other renderings49% · 34×

69 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 35 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 69 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakκελεύωI command, orderἐπί
καίand, even, also, nam
Ἰορδάνηςthe Jordanπόλιςa cityαὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, rais
ποιέωI do, make
ΠαῦλοςPaul
Article the
ἐγώ
δεῖit is necessary,σύν
ἄγωhe may bring [them]69×
what comes after →
αὐτός
πρόςεἰςἐπί
πρός
αὐτόςArticle theἍνναςAnnas
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰσάγωI lead in, bringἐγώ
Article the
ὄνοςa donkey, an assἸσραήλPropἀνήρa male human bei
δέbut, on the other ha
αὐτόςArticle theκαίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἄγω · 69× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Mark 2 Timothy James Romans 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians Galatians Hebrews
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 46c. AD 40

οἷα γὰρ ἡνίοχος ἡνιῶν ἢ κυβερνήτης οἰάκων ἐνειλημμένος ἄγει ᾗ ἂν ἐθέλῃ κατὰ νόμον καὶ δίκην ἕκαστα μηδενὸς προσδεόμενος ἄλλου·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.120c. AD 75–95

Σκίδνανται δὴ τὸ λοιπὸν ἐντεῦθεν ὑπὸ τῆς ἀλλογλωσσίας τὰς ἀποικίας ποιησάμενοι πανταχοῦ, καὶ γῆν ἕκαστοι κατελάμβανον τὴν ἐντυχοῦσαν καὶ εἰς ἣν αὐτοὺς ἦγεν ὁ θεός, ὡς πληρωθῆναι πᾶσαν αὐτῶν ἤπειρον μεσόγεών τε καὶ παράλιον·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.2c. AD 100

γέγραπται γὰρ περὶ αὐτοῦ ἅ μὲν πρὸς τὸν Ἰσραήλ, ἃ δὲ πρὸς ἡμᾶς, λέγει δὲ οὕτως: Ἐτραυματίσθη διὰ τὰς ἀνομίας ἡμῶν καὶ μεμαλάκισται διὰ τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν: τῷ μώλωπι αὐτοῦ ἡμεῖς ἰάθημεν: ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη, καὶ ὡς ἀμνὸς ἄφωνος ἐναντίον τοῦ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59383276 BC–227 BC

τεσσάρων ἐξαγωγῶν σχοινία κ ἀνὰ ὀβολὸν α 𐅵 γίνονται δραχμαὶ ε. καὶ ὀχετοὺς δεῖ ἀγαγεῖν οἳ ἄξουσιν τὸν ὄμβρον εἰς τὰς ἐξαγωγοὺς σχοινίων ι ἀνὰ ὀβολὸν γίνεται α τετρώβολον

δὲ καὶ ὧν ἕνεκεν κατεπλεύσαμεν κατὰ λόγον ὄντα· οὐ μέντοι γε ἐξεποίησεν ἐπὶ τέλος ἀγαγεῖν διὰ τὰς ἐνεστηκυίας ἀσχολίας Ζηνοδώρωι· ἀλλὰ πεπείσμεθα ἐν Μέμφει ἔσεσθαι. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους ε, Φαρμοῦθι

PSI 6 680Philadelphia ? (Arsinoites244 BC

τε ἥδιον διδῶις ποιοῦντός τι ἐμοῦ πλέον σοι. εἰ δʼ ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν κελεύεις, τὸν μὲν καιρὸν αὐτὸς εἰδήσεις, ἐμοὶ δὲ καλῶς λως ἂν ποιήσαις συντάξας ὅπως

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
εἰςeis to G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

requested from him letters in Damascus to the synagogues, so that if any he shall find of the way being men both and women, bound he may bring [them] to Jerusalem.
Ἰερουσαλήμ.Hierousalēm Jerusalem. G2419 Noun · proper name, indeclinable
76× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Jerusalem is the capital of Palestine, an important city in the Bible. It's mentioned in Matthew 2:3 and many other places, often as a center of worship and faith.
Amplified meaning
the holy city, the capital of Palestine
Tyndale gloss
Jerusalem
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The word Ἱεροσόλυμα (i.e. Jerusalem) is a proper noun of Hebrew origin, referring to the capital of Palestine. It appears in various forms in the New Testament, with Ἱερουσαλήμ being the indeclinable form used most frequently. The lexicons note its symbolic significance in verses like Galatians 4:25-26 and Hebrews 12:22, where it represents both the earthly city and a heavenly counterpart.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἱερουσαλήμ, v.s. Ἱεροσόλυμα.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Ἱεροσόλυμα [WH Ἴερ.. see their Intr. § 408], -ων, τά, (the invariable form in Mk. and Jn., almost everywhere in Mt. ana Joseph. [e. Ap. 1, 22, 13, ete.; Philo, leg. ad Gaium ὃ 36; (ef. Polyb. 16, 39, 4); al.]), and Ἱερουσαλήμ [WH.lep. (see ref. u. s.)], 7, indecl., (the invariable form in the Sept. [Josh. x. 1, ete.; Philo de somn. ii. 39 init. ; so Aristot. in Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 (where see Miiller)]; in the N. T. where a certain sacred emphasis, so to speak, resides in the very name, as Gal. iv. 25 sq. [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2, 10; thus in direct address: Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; both forms are used promiscuously [yet with a marked preference for the indeclinable form] in the O. T. Apocr., and in the writ. of Luke and of Paul; [cf. Tdf Proleg. p- 119; WH. App. p. 160]. Whether there is also a third and unusual form Ἱεροσόλυμα, -ης, ἡ, in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἱερουσαλήμ (Hierousalēm) — Jerusalem.

Ἱερουσαλήμ, see: Ἱεροσόλυμα - (WH, Ἰερ-, see Intr., § 408), -ων, τά (on πᾶσα Ἱ., Mat.2:3, see WM, 794; M, Pr., 48, 244; Thayer, see word), and Ἱερουσαλήμ (WH, Ἰερ-), ἡ., indecl., as always in LXX exc. some parts of Apocr.. (Heb. יְרוּשָׁלִַם), the former always in FlJ, Mk, Jo EV. and Mt (except. Mat.27:37), and most frequently in Lk, the latter always in He, Re, and by St. Paul (except. Gal.1:17-18 2:1),

Jerusalem: Mat.2:1, Mrk.3:8, Jhn.1:19, al.; its…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἱεροσόλυμα

Hierousalem

of Hebrew origin (3389); Hierusalem (i.e. Jerushalem), the capitol of

Palestine:--Jerusalem. Compare 2414.

see GREEK for 2414

see HEBREW for 03389

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἱερουσαλήμ, ἡ

Prop.n.

Jerusalem

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἰερουσαλήμ Ierousalēm 77x

Jerusalem, pr. name, indecl., also spelled Ἱεροσόλυμα   62x in our text. See PhotoGuide.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-PRI — Noun · proper name, indeclinable
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-PRI Indeclinable PRoper Noun

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

je-roo'-sa-lem:

I. THE NAME

1. In Cuneiform

2. In Hebrew

3. In Greek and Latin

4. The Meaning of Jerusalem

5. Other Names

II. GEOLOGY, CLIMATE AND SPRINGS

1. Geology

2. Climate and Rainfall

3. The Natural Springs

III. THE NATURAL SITE

1. The Mountains Around

2. The Valleys

3. The Hills

IV. GENERAL TOPOGRAPHY OF JERUSALEM

1. Description of Josephus

2. Summary of the Names of the Five Hills

3. The Akra

4. The Lower City

5. City of David and Zion

V. EXCAVATIONS AND ANTIQUITIES

1. Robinson

2. Wilson, and the Palestine Exploration Fund (1865)

3. Warren and Conder

4. Maudslay

5. Schick

6. Clermont-Ganneau

7. Bliss and Dickie

8. Jerusalem Archaeological Societies

VI. THE CITY'S WALLS AND GATES

1. The Existing Walls

2. Wilson's Theory

3. The Existing Gates

4. Buried Remains of Earlier Walls

5. The Great Dam of the Tyropoeon

6. Ruins of Ancient Gates

7. Josephus' Description of the Walls

8. First Wall

9. Second Wall

10. Third Wall

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Jerusalem

Called also Salem, Ariel, Jebus, the “city of God,” the “holy city;” by the modern Arabs el-Khuds, meaning “the holy;” once “the city of Judah” (2 Chr. 25:28). This name is in the original in the dual form, and means “possession of peace,” or “foundation of peace.” The dual form probably refers to the two mountains on which it was built, viz., Zion and Moriah; or, as some suppose, to the two parts of the city, the “upper” and the “lower city.” Jerusalem is a “mountain city enthroned on a mountain fastness” (comp. Ps. 68:15, 16; 87:1; 125:2; 76:1, 2; 122:3). It stands on the edge of one of the highest table-lands in Palestine, and is surrounded on the south-eastern, the southern, and the western sides by deep and precipitous ravines.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(the habitation of peace), Jerusalem stands in latitude 31 degrees 46’ 35" north and longitude 35 degrees 18’ 30" east of Greenwich. It is 32 miles distant from the sea and 18 from the Jordan, 20 from Hebron and 36 from Samaria. "In several respects," says Dean Stanley, "its situation is singular among the cities of Palestine. Its elevation is remarkable; occasioned not from its being on the summit of one of the numerous hills of Judea, like most of the towns and villages, but because it is on the edge of one of the highest table-lands of the country. Hebron indeed is higher still by some hundred feet, and from the south, accordingly (even from Bethlehem), the approach to Jerusalem is by a slight descent. But from any other side the ascent is perpetual; and to the traveller approaching the city from the east or west it must always have presented the appearance beyond any other capital…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The chief city of the Holy Land, and to the Christian the most illustrious in the world. It is situated in 31 degrees 46’43" N. lat., and 35 degrees 13’ E. long. on elevated ground south of the center of the country, about thirty-seven miles from the Mediterranean, and about twenty-four from the Jordan. Its site was early hallowed by God’s trial of Abraham’s faith, Ge 22:1-24 2Ch 3:1. It was on the border of the tribes of Benjamin and Judah, mostly within the limits of the former, but reckoned as belonging to the latter, because conquered by it, Jos 15:8 18:16,28 Jud 1:18. The most ancient name of the city was Salem, Ge…

Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 367 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 2.250c. AD 40

ἡ δὲ θεοῦ πόλις ὑπὸ Ἑβραίων Ἱερουσαλὴμ καλεῖται, ἧς μεταληφθὲν τοὔνομα ὅρασίς ἐστιν εἰρήνης.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.180c. AD 75–95

τὴν μέντοι Σολυμᾶ ὕστερον ἐκάλεσεν Ἱεροσόλυμα.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 41.2c. AD 96

οὐ πανταχοῦ, ἀδελφοί, προσφέρονται θυσίαι ἐνδελεχισμοῦ ἢ εὐχῶν ἢ περὶ ἁμαρτίας καὶ πλημμελείας, ἀλλ̓ ἢ ἐν Ἱερουσαλὴμ μόνῃ: κἀκεῖ δὲ οὐκ ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ προσφέρεται, ἀλλ̓ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ ναοῦ πρὸς τὸ θυσιαστήριον, μωμοσκοπηθὲν τὸ προσφερόμενον διὰ τοῦ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 8th c. AD
P. Murabba'ât 2 114MurabaatAD 70–AD 132

Τίτου Στατιλίου Σεουήρου πρὸ η εἰδῶν Ἰουλίων Πανέμου ὀγδόῃ καὶ δεκάτῃ … ἐν Ἱεροσολύμᾳ … αυουαια … Ὀρεινῆς προς … λεγεῶνος δεκάτης Φρετηνσίας ἑκατονταρχίας … νιου Σατορνείνου

P.Ross.Georg. 4 4Aphrodites Kome (Antaiopolites)AD 710

δυναμένους ἀνθέξεσθαι τῷ ἔργῳ ἀπόστειλον διʼ ἀποκρισιαρίου σου ὅπως ἐξέλθωσιν διὰ στράτας εἰς αὐτὰ Ἱεροσόλυμα παρασκευάζων πληρωθῆναι αὐτοὺς τοὺς μισθοὺς καὶ τὴν ἀποτροφὴν αὐτῶν ἀποστέλλων τὸ χρυσίον τῆς δαπάνης

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate